Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
© 2013 SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.
ANSYS, ANSYS Workbench, Ansoft, AUTODYN, EKM, Engineering Knowledge Manager, CFX, FLUENT, HFSS and any
and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks or
trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark used
by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product, service
and feature names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Disclaimer Notice
THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFID-
ENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.
For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).
Third-Party Software
See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software
and third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, please contact ANSYS, Inc.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. iii
Tutorials
4.16. Step 13: Additional Exercise to Model Higher Altitude Effect ......................................................... 128
5. Cold-Plate Model with Non-Conformal Meshing ................................................................................ 131
5.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 131
5.2. Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................. 131
5.3. Problem Description ..................................................................................................................... 131
5.4. Step 1: Create a New Project .......................................................................................................... 132
5.5. Step 2: Build the Model ................................................................................................................. 132
5.6. Step 3: Create a Separately Meshed Assembly ................................................................................ 136
5.7. Step 4: Generate a Mesh ................................................................................................................ 137
5.8. Step 5: Physical and Numerical Settings ......................................................................................... 139
5.9. Step 6: Save the Model .................................................................................................................. 142
5.10. Step 7: Calculate a Solution .......................................................................................................... 142
5.11. Step 8: Examine the Results ......................................................................................................... 142
5.12. Step 9: Summary ......................................................................................................................... 143
5.13. Step 10: Additional Exercise ......................................................................................................... 144
6. Heat-Pipe Modeling and Nested Non-Conformal Meshing ................................................................ 145
6.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 145
6.2. Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................. 145
6.3. Problem Description ..................................................................................................................... 145
6.4. Step 1: Create a New Project .......................................................................................................... 146
6.5. Step 2: Build the Model ................................................................................................................. 147
6.6. Step 3: Create Nested Non-conformal Mesh Using Assemblies ........................................................ 152
6.7. Step 4: Generate a Mesh ................................................................................................................ 153
6.8. Step 5: Physical and Numerical Settings ......................................................................................... 154
6.9. Step 6: Save the Model .................................................................................................................. 156
6.10. Step 7: Calculate a Solution .......................................................................................................... 156
6.11. Step 8: Examine the Results ......................................................................................................... 156
6.12. Step 9: Summary ......................................................................................................................... 158
7. Non-Conformal Mesh .......................................................................................................................... 161
7.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 161
7.2. Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................. 161
7.3. Problem Description ..................................................................................................................... 161
7.4. Step 1: Create a New Project .......................................................................................................... 162
7.5. Step 2: Build the Model ................................................................................................................. 162
7.6. Step 3: Generate a Conformal Mesh ............................................................................................... 165
7.7. Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings ......................................................................................... 166
7.8. Step 5: Save the Model .................................................................................................................. 167
7.9. Step 6: Calculate a Solution ........................................................................................................... 167
7.10. Step 7: Examine the Results ......................................................................................................... 167
7.11. Step 8: Add an Assembly to the Model ......................................................................................... 169
7.12. Step 9: Generate a Non-conformal Mesh ...................................................................................... 171
7.13. Step 10: Save the Model .............................................................................................................. 172
7.14. Step 11: Calculate a Solution ........................................................................................................ 173
7.15. Step 12: Examine the Results ....................................................................................................... 174
7.16. Step 13: Summary ....................................................................................................................... 175
8. Mesh and Model Enhancement Exercise ............................................................................................. 177
8.1. Objective ...................................................................................................................................... 177
8.2. Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................. 177
8.3. Skills Covered ............................................................................................................................... 177
8.4. Training Method Used ................................................................................................................... 177
8.5. Loading the Model ........................................................................................................................ 177
8.6. A 15 Minute Exploration ................................................................................................................ 178
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
iv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Tutorials
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. v
Tutorials
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
vi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Tutorials
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. vii
Tutorials
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
viii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Tutorials
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. ix
Tutorials
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
x of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Tutorials
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xi
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 1: Using This Manual
1.1. What’s In This Manual
This manual contains tutorials that teach you how to use ANSYS Icepak to solve different types of
problems. In each tutorial, features related to problem setup and postprocessing are demonstrated.
The tutorial Finned Heat Sink provides detailed instructions designed to introduce the beginner to
ANSYS Icepak. This tutorial provides explicit instructions for all steps in the problem setup, solution,
and postprocessing. The remaining tutorials assume that you have read or solved the tutorial Finned
Heat Sink, or that you are already familiar with ANSYS Icepak and its interface. In these tutorials, some
steps will not be shown explicitly. The input files are available in the installation area and available for
download on the ANSYS Customer Portal.
You may want to refer to other tutorials for instructions on using specific features, such as grouping
objects, even if the problem solved in the tutorial is not of particular interest to you.
You may want to refer to other tutorials for instructions on using specific features, such as grouping
objects, even if the problem solved in the tutorial is not of particular interest to you.
• Different type styles are used to indicate graphical user interface menu items and text inputs that you
enter (e.g., Open project panel, enter the name projectname).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1
Using This Manual
• A mini flow chart is used to indicate the menu selections that lead you to a specific panel. For example,
indicates that the Generate mesh option can be selected from the Model menu at the top of the
ANSYS Icepak main window.
The arrow points from a specific menu toward the item you should select from that menu.
• A mini flow chart is also used to indicate the list tree selections that lead you to a specific panel or oper-
ation. For example,
indicates that the Basic parameters item can be selected from the Problem setup node in the
Model manager window
• Pictures of toolbar buttons are also used to indicate the button that will lead you to a specific panel. For
example, indicates that you will need to click on this button (in this case, to open the Walls panel) in
the toolbar.
1. Read the section(s) of the manual containing information on the options you are trying to use.
2. Recall the exact steps you were following that led up to and caused the problem.
4. For particularly difficult problems, package up the project in which the problem occurred (see Packing
and Unpacking Model Files in the Icepak User's Guide for instructions) and send it to your support engineer.
This is the best source that we can use to reproduce the problem and thereby help to identify the cause.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
2 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 2: Finned Heat Sink
2.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates how to model a finned heat sink using ANSYS Icepak as well many features
and functions essential to any ANSYS Icepak project. For the sake of brevity, many of the later tutorials
do not cover basic steps or explain the steps in detail as those tutorials assume you have completed
this tutorial beforehand.
• Set up a simulation with various physical conditions and parameters, including turbulence.
• Calculate a solution.
• Post-process your results by using object faces, plane cuts, and isosurfaces to create contours and vector
fields.
2.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have little to no experience with ANSYS Icepak and thus each step is
described explicitly.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 3
Finned Heat Sink
When ANSYS Icepak starts, the Welcome to Icepak panel opens automatically.
2. Click New in the Welcome to Icepak panel to start a new ANSYS Icepak project.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
4 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
ANSYS Icepak creates a default cabinet with the dimensions 1 m × 1 m × 1 m, and displays the
cabinet in the graphics window.
Note
You can rotate the cabinet around a central point using the left mouse button, or you
can translate it to any point on the screen using the middle mouse button. You can zoom
into and out from the cabinet using the right mouse button. To restore the cabinet to
its default orientation, select Home position in the Orient menu. Alternatively, you can
click the Home position icon ( ) above the graphics display window or press the H
key.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 5
Finned Heat Sink
Model → Cabinet
Extra
You can also open the Cabinet panel by selecting the Cabinet item in the Model manager
window and then clicking the Edit object button ( ) in the Object modification toolbar.
Resizing of the cabinet object can also be done in the geometry window in the lower
right hand corner of the GUI.
xS 0 xE 0.075
yS 0 yE 0.25
zS 0 zE 0.356
d. In the Orient menu, select Scale to fit to scale the view of the cabinet to fit the graphics window.
Extra
You can also scale the view by clicking the Scale to fit button ( ).
Extra
After selecting the object to be edited in the Model manager window, there are
several ways you can open the Edit panel:
– Type Ctrl+E, or
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
6 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
– Right-click the object in the Model manager window and scroll to Edit object, or
– Click the Edit button in the object geometry window located in the bottom right-
hand corner, or
The backing plate is 0.006 m thick and divides the cabinet into two regions: the device side (where
the high-power devices are contained in a housing) and the fin side (where the fins dissipate heat
generated by the devices). The backing plate is represented in the model by a solid prism block.
Extra
Blocks and conducting thick plates allow six-sided control for meshing and thermal spe-
cifications. Conducting thin plates, however, have no physical thickness and therefore
allow for only two-sided control.
ANSYS Icepak creates a new solid prism block in the center of the cabinet. You need to change
the size of the block.
xS 0 xE 0.006
yS 0 yE 0.25
zS 0 zE 0.356
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 7
Finned Heat Sink
3. Create the free opening on the fin side of the backing plate.
ANSYS Icepak creates a free rectangular opening on the X-Y plane at the center of the cabinet.
You need to change the size of the opening.
xS 0.006 xE 0.075
yS 0 yE 0.25
zS 0.356 zE —
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
8 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Each fan is physically identical to the others, except with respect to its location on the cabinet wall.
To create the set of three fans, you will build a single fan as a template and then create two copies,
each with a specified offset in the y direction.
ANSYS Icepak creates a free circular fan lying in the X-Y plane in the center of the cabinet. You
need to change the size of the fan and specify its volumetric flow rate.
xC 0.04
yC 0.0475
zC 0
e. Enter 0.03 for the external radius (Radius), and 0.01 for the internal radius (Int Radius).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 9
Finned Heat Sink
h. Under the Fan flow tab, select Fixed and Volumetric. Enter a volumetric flow rate of 18 cfm.
Note
Make sure to update the units to cfm by clicking on the triangle button and selecting
cfm from the drop-down list.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
10 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
5. Copy the first fan (fan.1) to create the second and third fans (fan.1.1 and fan.1.2).
a. In the graphics display window, select fan.1 using the right mouse button.
b. In the object context menu, select Copy and the Copy fan fan.1 panel opens.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 11
Finned Heat Sink
e. Click Apply.
ANSYS Icepak makes two copies of the original fan, each offset by 0.0775 m in the y direction
from the previous one.
Extra:
Alternatively, you can simply select the object(s) you need to copy in the Model manager
window and then press Ctrl+C to bring up the Copy panel for the object(s).
Like the fans, each device is physically identical to the others, except with respect to its location in
the cabinet. To create the set of five devices, you will build a single rectangular planar source as a
template and then create four copies, each with a specified offset in the y direction.
ANSYS Icepak creates a free rectangular source in the center of the cabinet. You need to change
the geometry and size of the source and specify its heat source parameters.
Note
For planar objects, select the desired plane first, then enter the coordinates.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
12 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
xS 0 xE —
yS 0.0315 yE 0.0385
zS 0.1805 zE 0.2005
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 13
Finned Heat Sink
7. Copy the first device (source.1) to create the other four devices (source.1.1, source.1.2, source.1.3, and
source.1.4).
a. In the Model manager window, select the source.1 item under the Model node.
c. Follow the same instructions that you used above to copy the fans, using a Y offset of 0.045 m to
create 4 copies.
Like the fans and devices, each fin is physically identical to the others, except with respect to its
location in the cabinet. To create the array of ten fins, you will build a single rectangular plate as a
template, and then create nine copies, each with a specified offset in the y direction.
ANSYS Icepak creates a free rectangular plate on the X-Y plane at the center of the cabinet. You
need to change the orientation and size of the plate and specify its thermal parameters.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
14 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
xS 0.006 xE 0.075
yS 0.0125 yE —
zS 0.05 zE 0.331
g. Under Thermal model, select Conducting thick from the drop-down menu.
Note
Since the default solid material is extruded aluminum, you do not need to explicitly
specify the material here.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 15
Finned Heat Sink
9. Copy the first fin (plate.1) to create the other nine fins (plate.1.1, plate.1.2, ..., plate.1.9).
a. In the Model manager window, select the plate.1 item under the Model node.
c. Follow the same instructions that you used above to copy the fans, using a Y offset of 0.025 m to
create 9 copies.
The completed model is shown in Figure 2.2: Completed Model for the Finned Heat Sink (p. 17),
visible in the Isometric view (available in the Orient menu or by clicking the Isometric view button
( )).
Note
You can remove the object names by clicking the Display object names button ( ).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
16 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
You can display all object types, filter blocks by type (fluid, solid, network, hollow), and display blocks
with traces and/or CAD block. This feature is useful for model verification. You can display all plate
objects that have the conducting thick sub type.
b. The Show objects by type panel appears as shown in Figure 2.3: Show objects by type Panel (p. 17).
c. Select Plate for Object type and Conducting thick for Sub type.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 17
Finned Heat Sink
d. Click Display to show the conducting thick plates. The model then appears as in Figure 2.4: Display
of Conducting Thick Plate Objects (p. 18).
11. Check the model to be sure that there are no problems (for example, objects that are too close together
to allow for proper mesh generation).
Note
You can also click the Check model button ( ) to check the model.
Note
ANSYS Icepak should report in the Message window that 0 problems were found.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
18 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Generate a Mesh
12. Check the definition of the modeling objects to ensure that you specified them properly.
The summary report now appears in a web browser. The summary displays a list of all the objects
in the model and all the parameters that have been set for each object. You can view the detailed
version of the summary by clicking the appropriate object names or property specifications. If you
notice any incorrect specifications, you can return to the appropriate modeling object panel and
change the settings in the same way that you originally entered them.
Note
The summary report also shows the user-specified material properties for each of the
objects to help identify the proper material specifications. Figure 2.5: Partial Table of
Summary Report for Blocks (p. 19) shows the summary report for block.1, which includes
its material specifications.
Extra
For more information on how to refine a mesh locally, refer to Refining the Mesh Locally.
Extra
You can also generate a mesh by clicking the Generate mesh button ( ), which opens the
Mesh control panel.
a. In the Mesh control panel, select Coarse in the Mesh parameters drop-down list.
ANSYS Icepak updates the panel with the default meshing parameters for a coarse (minimum-
count) mesh, shown in the panel below.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 19
Finned Heat Sink
b. Set the Mesh units and all the Minimum gap units to mm.
d. Set the Max X size to 3.5, the Max Y size to 12.5, and the Max Z size to 17.5.
Note
If the Allow minimum gap changes option is unchecked under the Misc tab, ANSYS
Icepak will inform you that your minimum object separation is more than 10% of the
smallest size object in the model. You can stop the meshing process, ignore the
warning, or allow ANSYS Icepak to correct the values.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
20 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Generate a Mesh
f. If this warning appears, click Change value and mesh in the Minimum separation in x and Minimum
separation in y panels to accept the recommended changes to your model and continue generating
the mesh.
The mesh display plane is perpendicular to the fins, and aligned with the devices, as shown in
Figure 2.6: Coarse Mesh on the Y-Z Plane (p. 22).
Note
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 21
Finned Heat Sink
e. Use the slider bar to move the plane cut through the model. See Figure 2.7: Fine and Coarse Mesh
on the Y-Z Plane (p. 23) to examine a close-up view of the coarse mesh.
Note
You can change the mesh color using the Surface mesh color and the Plane mesh
color options.
The mesh elements near the fins are too large to sufficiently resolve the problem physics. In the
next step, you will generate a finer mesh.
b. Under the Global tab, select Normal in the Mesh parameters drop-down list.
ANSYS Icepak updates the panel with the default meshing parameters under the Global tab.
4. Click the Generate button in the Mesh control panel to generate the finer mesh.
The graphics display updates automatically to show the new mesh. Click the Display tab and use
slider bar to advance the plane cut and view the mesh throughout the model.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
22 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Generate a Mesh
Note
After deselecting the Display mesh option and closing the Mesh control panel, you
can display the mesh on selected objects by using the context menu in the graphics
display window. To display the context menu, hold down the Shift key and press the
right mouse button anywhere in the graphics window, but not on an object. Select
Display mesh and select the object you want it displayed on.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 23
Finned Heat Sink
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
24 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings
a. Click the Reset button as shown in Figure 2.9: Basic settings panel (p. 25). Reset calculates the
Reynolds and Peclet numbers.
The Reynolds and Peclet numbers are approximately 13,000 and 9,000, respectively, so the flow
is turbulent. ANSYS Icepak consequently recommends setting the flow regime to turbulent.
Note
These values are only estimates, based on the current model setup. Actual values may
vary, and may need verification, depending on your design.
2. Using the Problem setup wizard, enable turbulence modeling using the zero equation turbulence
model and neglecting radiation heat transfer.
a. In the Model manager window, right-click Problem setup and then select Problem setup wizard
(Figure 2.10: Problem setup wizard panel at step 1 of 14 (p. 26)). The Problem setup wizard provides
a simple interface with user guidance for defining the physics of the model.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 25
Finned Heat Sink
b. For step 1 of 14, keep the default settings for check boxes. Click Next.
c. For step 2 of 14, keep the default flow condition selected. Click Next.
d. Note that you are now at step 5 of 14 according to the Problem setup wizard panel, shown in Fig-
ure 2.11: Problem setup wizard at step 5 of 14 (p. 27). Ensure that you select Set flow regime to
turbulent.
Extra
Hold your mouse pointer over any selection in the Problem setup wizard to have a
text bubble appear for additional information on the selection, as shown in Fig-
ure 2.11: Problem setup wizard at step 5 of 14 (p. 27).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
26 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings
Click Next.
e. For step 6 of 14, select Zero equation (mixing length) as your turbulence model. Click Next.
f. For step 7 of 14, select Ignore heat transfer due to radiation. Click Next.
g. Note that you are now at step 9 of 14 according to the panel. Leave the check box empty to exclude
solar radiation and click Next.
h. For step 10 of 14, select Variables do not vary with time (steady-state) for steady-state simulation.
Click Next.
i. Note that you are now at step 14 of 14, as shown in Figure 2.12: Problem setup wizard at step 14 of
14 (p. 28). Ignore altitude effects by leaving the check boxes empty. Click Done to finish the Problem
setup wizard, fully defining the problem setup.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 27
Finned Heat Sink
Note
You can edit these settings and other aspects of the problem setup by double-clicking
Basic parameters in the Model manager window. Figure 2.13: Basic parameters
panel (p. 29) shows the Basic parameters panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
28 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 6: Calculate a Solution
Note
Alternatively, you can click the button in the File commands toolbar.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 29
Finned Heat Sink
Note
You can click the Run solution button ( ) in the Model and solve toolbar.
2. Match your settings to those of Figure 2.14: Solve Panel (p. 30).
Note
No universal metric exists for judging convergence; a good indicator is when the solution
no longer changes with more iterations and when the residuals have decreased to a
certain degree. The default criterion is that each residual reduces to a value of less than
− −
except the energy residual, for which the default criterion is . It is a good idea
to judge convergence not only by examining residual levels, but also by monitoring rel-
evant integrated quantities.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
30 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 6: Calculate a Solution
ANSYS Icepak begins to calculate a solution for the model, and a separate window opens where the
solver prints the numerical values of the residuals. ANSYS Icepak also opens the Solution residuals
graphics display and control window, where it displays the convergence history for the calculation.
Upon completion of the calculation, your residual plot will look something like Figure 2.15: Plot of
Solution Residuals (p. 32). You can zoom in the residual plot by using the left mouse.
Note
The actual values of the residuals may differ slightly on different machines, so your plot
may not look exactly the same as Figure 2.15: Plot of Solution Residuals (p. 32).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 31
Finned Heat Sink
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
32 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
• summary report
The following steps illustrate how to generate and display each view.
Note
The objective of this exercise is to determine whether the air flow and heat transfer associated
with the heat sink (fans and fins) are sufficient to maintain device temperatures below 65°C.
You can accomplish this by creating different plane cuts and monitoring the velocity vector
and temperature on it. Plane-cut views allow you to observe the variation in a solution variable
across the surface of a plane.
You will use the Plane cut panel to view the direction and magnitude of velocity across a
horizontal plane.
1. To open the Plane cut panel, select Plane cut in the Post menu.
Extra
You can also open the Plane cut panel by clicking the Plane cut button ( ).
2. Display velocity vectors on a plane cut on the fin side of the enclosure.
a. In the Name field, enter the name cut-velocity as shown in Figure 2.16: Plane cut Panel for cut-
velocity (p. 34).
Tip
Click the drop-down arrow button located next to the Set position text field to open
the drop-down list.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 33
Finned Heat Sink
e. In the Display options box, select Dart in the Arrow style drop-down menu (Figure 2.17: Plane cut
vectors Panel for cut-velocity (p. 34)). This will display the vectors as dart-like objects.
g. Click Create.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
34 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
This orients the model as shown in Figure 2.18: Velocity Vectors on the Fin Side of the Enclos-
ure (p. 35). You can see that the maximum velocity occurs at the fan blades. The lowest velocity
occurs between the top fin and the adjacent cabinet wall, and between the bottom fin and the
adjacent cabinet wall.
Extra
You can also select the positive X orientation by clicking the Orient positive X button
( ).
This temporarily removes the velocity vector display from the graphics window, so that you can
more easily view the next post-processing object.
Note
You can later open the Inactive folder in the Model manager window and locate
cut_velocity. The object cut_velocity can be either deleted or reactivated
by dragging it to Trash or to the Post-processing folder, as well as within the right-
click context menu.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 35
Finned Heat Sink
g. For Color levels, select Calculated and then select This object from the drop-down list.
h. Click Apply.
ANSYS Icepak computes the color range for the display based on the range of temperatures on
this plane cut.
i. Click Done to save the new settings, close the panel, and update the graphics display.
The graphics display updates to show the temperature contour plot. The actual values of tem-
perature may slightly differ on different systems. You can use the scroll bar to change the x-
location of the plane cut. In addition, the plane cut can be dragged through the model when
you hold down the Shift key and the middle mouse button on the plane. Ensure you click the
edge of the plane cut so as to not move any objects.
Figure 2.19: Temperature Contours on the Fin Side of the Enclosure (p. 37) shows that heat is
conducted through the fins in both directions away from the sources as well as the thermal
boundary layers resulting from the forced convection.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
36 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
iii. Click the square next to Fixed color and select black from the color palette.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 37
Finned Heat Sink
ii. In the Plane cut contours panel, select Pressure in the Contours of drop-down list.
iv. For Color levels, select Calculated and then select This object from the drop-down list.
v. Click Done to save the new settings, close the panel, and update the graphics display.
The graphics display updates to show the pressure contour plot superimposed onto the ve-
locity vector plot.
Figure 2.20: Pressure Contours and Velocity Vectors on the Fin Side of the Enclosure (p. 38) shows
isolated regions of high pressure immediately downstream of the fans, including local maxima
at the upstream tips of the fins.
Figure 2.20: Pressure Contours and Velocity Vectors on the Fin Side of the Enclosure
An object-face view allows you to examine the distribution of a solution variable on one or more
faces of an object in the model. To generate an object-face view, you must select the object and
specify both the variable to be displayed (e.g., temperature) and the attributes of the view (e.g.,
shading type).
You will use the Object face panel to create a solid-band object-face view of temperature on all
five high-power devices and on the backing plate.
a. To open the Object face panel, select Object face in the Post menu.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
38 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
Extra
You can also open the Object face panel by clicking the Object face button ( ).
c. In the Object drop-down list, click source.1, hold down the Shift key, and click source.1.4 to select
all the sources, and click the Accept button.
f. In the Object face contours panel, keep the default selection of Temperature in the Contours of
drop-down list.
h. For Color levels, select Calculated and then select This object from the drop-down list.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 39
Finned Heat Sink
i. Click Done to save the new settings, close the panel, and update the graphics display.
The graphics display updates to show the temperature contours on the sources.
j. Use your right mouse button to zoom in and look more closely at each source.
Figure 2.21: Temperature Contours on the Five Devices (p. 41) shows a view with the temperature
contours on all five sources. The temperature distributions are similar for all sources: warm in
the center and decreasing in temperature toward the edges of the source. Temperature distribu-
tions on the top and bottom sources are similar to each other, as are distributions on the two
remaining sources.
Note
To view the temperature contours on an individual source, hold down the Shift key
and drag a box around a source object using the left mouse button. The source object
will show as highlighted in the Model manager window. Right-click the source object
to display the context menu and select Create → Object face(s) → Separate. ANSYS
Icepak displays the Object face panel for that particular object. Change the settings
to match the ones used above for all source objects and click Create.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
40 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
e. In the Object face contours panel, keep the default selection of Temperature in the Contours of
drop-down list.
g. For Level spacing, select Fixed and set the Number of contour lines to 200.
h. For Color levels, select Calculated and then select This object from the drop down list.
i. Click Done to save the new settings, close the panel, and update the graphics display.
The graphics display updates to show the temperature contours on the block. Figure 2.22: Tem-
perature Contours on the Backing Plate (p. 42) shows that most of the heat is confined to the
region near the sources. The maximum temperature occurs near the middle three sources.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 41
Finned Heat Sink
j. Click Done in the Object face panel to close the panel. Deselect the Active option for the object
face in the Model manager window.
7. Utilize the Transparency slider in the Plane cut panel to help visualize multiple plane cuts simultaneously.
a. Refer to Figure 2.16: Plane cut Panel for cut-velocity (p. 34). Select Active in the Plane cut panel to
display in the graphics display window. Select the check box for the Transparency slider in order to
enable transparency. Click and drag the slider between the allowable values 0.00–0.99 to control
the degree of transparency. In the Plane cut panel, deselect the Active option.
c. Figure 2.23: Example of Transparency Feature with Multiple Plane cut Contours (p. 43) is a combination
of two plane cut temperature contours and a partially transparent pressure contour as an example
of the Transparency feature. Notice that the single, semi-transparent pressure contour allows con-
current visualization of the temperature profiles immediately next to the block.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
42 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
Figure 2.23: Example of Transparency Feature with Multiple Plane cut Contours
8. Create a summary report of object-specific solution data. Summary reports can provide physical inform-
ation from the solution about specific Model objects, Groups objects, Post-processing objects and
Points objects. Follow the steps below to create a summary report:
a. First, make the post-processing object cut-temperature active again by accessing the context menu
under the Inactive node in the Model manager window.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 43
Finned Heat Sink
c. Click New in the Define summary report panel five times to create 5 rows of Objects.
d. In the first row, select object block.1, then click Accept. In the Value drop-down menu, select Heat
flow.
Note
Although you did not change the default settings of the check boxes Comb and
Mesh, you may encounter projects in which you need to change these. Comb refers
to “combined”: The report generates a single, combined value for all the sides selected;
deselecting the option would report the side values separately. Mesh allows you to
report on the reduced mesh of the selected object in the case that an object intersects
with other objects and the mesh in the intersecting region might not necessarily be-
long to the object of interest.
e. In the second row, use the Shift key to select all 3 fans, then click Accept. In the Value drop-down
menu, select Volume flow.
f. In the third row, use the Shift key to select all 5 sources, then click Accept. In the Value drop-down
menu, select Heat flow.
g. In the fourth row, use the Shift key to select all 10 plates, then click Accept. In the Value drop-down
menu, select Heat flow.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
44 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Summary
h. In the fifth row, use the Shift key to select post cut-temperature, then click Accept. Keep the default
settings in the other fields.
i. Click Write to generate a panel for the object summary report (Figure 2.24: Report summary data
Panel (p. 45)). Examine the values reported and confirm they are consistent with the physics of the
model. Click Done to exit out of this panel, then Close to exit the Define summary report panel.
Upon saving the project, all objects created during post-processing are saved within a
post_objects file for future retrieval.
In addition, you have learned the basic workflow of an ANSYS Icepak project, including model building,
mesh generation, problem setup, solution calculation, and post-processing as well essential features
and functions that you will likely use in later tutorials or your own projects.
We repeat some of the tips and best practices found in this tutorial for your convenience:
1. Best Practices
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 45
Finned Heat Sink
a. Check the default materials, properties, and operating conditions under the Defaults tab in the
Basic parameters panel. These defaults often render some specifications unnecessary.
b. Use the Show objects by type feature to verify your model objects by type.
c. Use the Check model feature to ensure there are no problems with the model.
d. View the HTML summary report (View → Summary (HTML)) to ensure proper specification of
geometries, properties, and materials for each object.
e. Select the Allow minimum gap changes option in the Misc tab of the Mesh control panel to allow
ANSYS Icepak to avoid unnecessary meshing due to inadvertent misalignments in the model. This is
suitable for this tutorial but may not be in other projects.
f. Select Normal in the Mesh parameters field when flow structures require finer grids than possible
with Coarse meshing.
g. Use the Problem setup wizard for guided problem setup. Edit the problem setup if needed using
the Basic parameters panel.
h. Save the model and mesh before starting the solution so that you can open the saved job and con-
tinue analysis in a future session.
i. Judge convergence by monitoring residual levels as well as relevant integrated quantities, which
should eventually stop changing significantly with more iterations.
a. Explore the several methods to complete a task as you work through a problem in ANSYS Icepak.
For example, you can edit model object geometries by using their object edit panel, or you can use
the Edit window in the bottom right-hand corner while having the object node selected in the
Model manager window. Use the options best suited for you to help streamline your workflow.
b. Choose blocks and plates according to your needs. Blocks and conducting thick plates allow six-sided
control for meshing and thermal specifications. Conducting thin plates, however, have no physical
thickness and therefore allow for only two-sided control.
c. Remove object names by clicking the Display object names button ( ) to reduce visual clutter in
the graphics window.
d. Use the Reset button in the Basic settings panel to have ANSYS Icepak estimate dimensionless
numbers (for example, the Reynolds and Peclet numbers for forced convection) and determine the
appropriate flow regime.
e. Hold your mouse pointer over any selection in the Problem setup wizard to have a text bubble
appear for additional information on the selection.
f. Use the Transparency slider in the post-processing object edit panels to improve visualization of
post-processing objects.
g. Use the post summary report to view an object-specific summary of the solution results.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
46 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Additional Exercise
Note
When you are finished examining the results, you can end the ANSYS Icepak session by
clicking Quit in the File menu.
File → Quit
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 47
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
48 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 3: RF Amplifier
3.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates how to model an RF amplifier using ANSYS Icepak as well many features and
functions essential to any ANSYS Icepak project. For the sake of brevity, many of the later tutorials do
not cover basic steps or explain the steps in detail as those tutorials assume you have completed this
and/or the last tutorial (Finned Heat Sink) beforehand.
• Create a model using openings, fans, sources, enclosures, PCBs, heat sinks, and walls.
• Set up a simulation with various physical conditions and parameters, including turbulence and natural
convection.
• Calculate a solution.
• Post-process your results by using power and temperature limits, object faces, plane cuts, isosurfaces and
variation plots.
3.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have little experience with ANSYS Icepak but that you are generally fa-
miliar with the interface. If you are not, review the Sample Session in the Icepak User’s Guide.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 49
RF Amplifier
When ANSYS Icepak starts, the Welcome to Icepak panel opens automatically.
2. Click New in the Welcome to Icepak panel to start a new ANSYS Icepak project.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
50 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
3. Specify the name rf_amp for your project and click Create.
ANSYS Icepak creates a default cabinet with the dimensions 1 m × 1 m × 1 m, and displays the
cabinet in the graphics window.
Note
You can rotate the cabinet around a central point using the left mouse button, or you
can translate it to any point on the screen using the middle mouse button. You can zoom
into and out from the cabinet using the right mouse button. To restore the cabinet to
its default orientation, select the Home position in the Orient menu. Alternatively, you
can click the Home position icon ( ) above the graphics window or press the H key.
1. Resize the default cabinet and create an opening on one side of the cabinet.
Model → Cabinet
Select the cabinet in the Model manager window and specify the following in the object geometry
window:
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 51
RF Amplifier
Extra
After selecting the object to be edited in the Model manager window, there are several
ways you can open the Edit panel:
– Type Ctrl+e, or
– Right-click the object in the Model manager window and scroll to Edit object, or
One side of this cabinet has an opening. To assign Properties on this boundary, in the Properties
tab of the Cabinet object panel (Figure 3.3: The Cabinet Boundary Panel (p. 53)):
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
52 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
2. Create the Y and Z faces of the amplifier housing as an enclosure using the enclosure object.
Click the Create enclosures icon ( ) in the model toolbar, then specify the following Name and
dimensions:
a. Change the Boundary type to Open for Min X and Max X. For others, retain the boundary type as
Thin.
Tip
c. Click Done.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 53
RF Amplifier
4. Click the Create walls icon ( ) in the model toolbar to create a new wall.
In the object edit window, name the wall Xmin and change the plane to Y-Z.
Note
Although you are using the align tools to place the wall at the desired locations, you
could also specify the dimensions/locations of the wall in the Geometry tab and achieve
the same result. However, the align tools are faster and thus the recommended method.
To start the process, click the Morph edges icon ( ) in the model toolbar. Now, follow the step-
by-step procedure described below:
a. Select the Zmax edge of the wall, indicated by the red edge in the figure (Figure 3.5: Schematic
Showing Edge Identities for Alignment (p. 55)) by left mouse clicking it in the graphical window.
Notice that it turns red to indicate that it has been selected.
c. Select the lower Zmax edge of the enclosure, indicated by the yellow edge in the figure (Fig-
ure 3.5: Schematic Showing Edge Identities for Alignment (p. 55)) with the left mouse button. Notice
that it turns yellow to indicate its selection.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
54 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
d. Click the middle mouse button to accept the transformation. The wall Xmin should have now been
moved and resized. Now the wall should extend to the entire Xmin side of the enclosure.
To specify the remaining wall dimension, stay in the Morph edges mode and complete the following
steps:
a. Click the Zmin edge of the wall with the left mouse button. Be sure that the Zmin edge of the wall
(and not the enclosure edge) is highlighted in red. By repeatedly clicking the left mouse button,
ANSYS Icepak cycles through all possible edges.
c. Using the left mouse button, click the lower Zmin edge of the enclosure.
d. Click the middle mouse button to accept. The wall now forms the Xmin face of the enclosure.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 55
RF Amplifier
e. Click the right mouse button to exit the Morph edges mode.
The resulting model is shown in Figure 3.6: Geometry with Wall (p. 56) with shading to highlight
new definitions. Shading is available under the Info tab in most panels.
Double-click the newly created wall object (Xmin) in the Model manager window to open the Walls
panel. Specify the following properties to the wall in the Properties tab.
c. Specify the External conditions as Heat transfer coefficient and click the Edit button.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
56 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
iii. Click Done to close the Wall external thermal conditions panel.
iv. Click Done to close Walls panel (Figure 3.7: The Walls Panel (p. 57)).
a. Click the Create printed circuit boards icon ( ) in the Model toolbar to create a PCB and double-
click the PCB object in the Model manager window.
c. Specify the Trace layer type as Detailed and specify the parameters under Trace layer parameters
(make sure that you enter both columns) in the Properties tab as shown in Figure 3.8: The Printed
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 57
RF Amplifier
circuit boards Panel (p. 58). Click the Add layer button 3 more times. There is a total of four internal
layers.
Note
Notice that the Effective conductivity in plane and normal directions are updated when you
click the Update button (Figure 3.8: The Printed circuit boards Panel (p. 58)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
58 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
There are 12 devices on the bottom side of the PCB. Create these devices as 2D sources. The following
steps show you how to create one and then use the copy utility to create the remaining 11 sources.
a. Click the Create sources icon ( ) in the model toolbar to create a source and double-click the source
object in the Model manager window.
c. In the Properties tab, specify the Total power as 7 W (Figure 3.9: The Sources Panel (p. 59)) and
click Done.
d. Create two copies of the source and separate them by 0.055 m in the Z direction. Follow the steps
below for copying the source object.
i. Right-click the source object and choose the Copy option. Alternatively, click the source object
in the Model manager window and press Ctrl+C to bring up the Copy panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 59
RF Amplifier
e. Similarly, create the other source objects (devices) by copying the sources created in the previous
steps.
i. Click and select device, then while holding down the Ctrl key, select device.1, and device.2.
Right-click and choose the Copy option, or press Ctrl+c.
Note
Following these two copy actions, you should now have 12 sources (Figure 3.11: Geo-
metry with Devices (p. 61)) in a four rows by three columns pattern.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
60 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
You will create an extruded fin heat sink with the flow in the Y direction to remove heat from the
PCB.
a. Click the Create heat sinks icon ( ) in the Model toolbar to create a heat sink and double-click the
heat sink object in the Model manager window. Specify the following dimensions in the geometry
window.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 61
RF Amplifier
b. In the Heat sinks object panel, select the Geometry tab, and specify a Base height of 0.004 m and
an Overall height of 0.04 m.
c. Specify the properties of the heat sink as shown in Figure 3.12: The Heat sinks Panel (p. 62) below.
Note that you are not changing parameters in the Flow/thermal data, Pressure loss, or Interface
tabs.
For this model, we will make use of ANSYS Icepak’s fan library and search tool.
a. Select the Library tab in the model manager window (Figure 3.13: Search Fan library Panel (p. 63)).
b. Right-click Libraries in the Model manager window and choose Search fans.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
62 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
i. In the Physical tab, deactivate the Min fan size and enter 80 mm for the Max fan size.
ii. Select the Thermal/flow tab, enable the Min flow rate option and specify a Min flow rate of 80
cfm.
Note
The minimum flow rate used in the search criteria implies the minimum free flow
of the fans.
Note
ANSYS Icepak lists all the fans in its libraries that satisfy these conditions.
c. Select the fan called delta.FFB0812_24EHE in the Name column by clicking it.
e. Now, specify the location of the fan. Resize the fan geometry as shown in Figure 3.14: The Fans Pan-
el (p. 64). Note the plane orientation is X-Z.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 63
RF Amplifier
The final geometry should look like Figure 3.15: The Final Geometry (p. 65).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
64 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
You can enable the display of all object types, the filtering of blocks by type (fluid, solid, network,
hollow), and the display of blocks with traces and/or CAD block. This feature is useful here to
view the otherwise unseen devices behind the heat sink. Generally, this also aids in model veri-
fication.
ii. The Show objects by type panel appears as shown in Figure 3.16: Show objects by type Pan-
el (p. 66).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 65
RF Amplifier
iii. Click Display to show the devices. The model then appears as in Figure 3.17: Displaying Objects
of Type Source (p. 66).
g. Check the definition of the modeling objects to ensure that you specified them properly.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
66 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Create Assemblies
Note
The HTML version of the summary displays in your web browser. The summary displays
a list of all the objects in the model and all the parameters that have been set for
each object. You can view the detailed version of the summary by clicking the appro-
priate object names or property specifications. If you notice any incorrect specifications,
you can return to the appropriate modeling object panel and change the settings in
the same way that you originally entered them.
a. Select the positive X view by either using the icon in the shortcut menu or simply press Shift+X and
then S to scale to fit the view in the graphics window.
b. While pressing Shift, drag a bounding box around the amplifier using the left mouse button. Do not
drag the bounding box around the fan. Release the mouse button and notice that all of the objects
forming the amplifier and heat sink have been selected in the Model manager window.
c. Right-click the highlighted enclosure ("Housing") in the Model manager window and select Create
and then Assembly from the list. You have now added all of the selected objects to the assembly.
d. In the Object geometry window, rename assembly.1 to amplifier and click Apply.
a. Click the Create assemblies icon ( ) in the model toolbar to create a new assembly.
b. In the Model manager window, use the left mouse button to drag the fan, delta.FFB0812_24EHE,
into the new assembly to add the fan to this assembly.
c. In the Object geometry window, rename this assembly as fan and click Apply.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 67
RF Amplifier
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
68 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Generate a Mesh
Note
Slack values represent a finite offset from an object to a non-conformal mesh boundary
and are required when meshing assemblies separately. Selecting small slack values can
decrease the total number of cells in the mesh with a negligible change in accuracy.
On the other hand slack values that are too large may cause excessive mesh bleeding.
It is good practice to set slack values such that two or three cells fit in the slack region.
Note that in this particular model the gap between the two assemblies is large enough
to accommodate nonzero slack values. Refer to Zero Slack with Non-Conformal Meshing
for more discussion on slack values.
1. Edit both assemblies (right-click the assembly name in the model toolbar and select Edit), then select
the Meshing tab.
2. Toggle Mesh separately and then specify the slack values indicated in the following table. Make sure
you remember to add slack values to both assemblies.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 69
RF Amplifier
3. To create the mesh, go to Model → Generate Mesh. The Mesh control panel (Figure 3.20: The Mesh
control Panel (p. 71)) appears. You can also open the Mesh control panel by clicking the Generate
mesh icon ( ) in the shortcut menu.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
70 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Generate a Mesh
4. First, generate a coarse mesh by choosing Coarse in the Mesh parameters drop-down list in the Global
tab, as shown in Figure 3.20: The Mesh control Panel (p. 71). Click Generate to create a mesh.
Note
If you have unchecked Allow minimum gap changes in the Misc tab, the Minimum
separation warning will appear. This warning message appears when the minimum gap
specified is more than 10% of the smallest sized object in the model. Select Change
value and mesh if the warning message pops up.
5. To view the mesh, display a plane cut view through the center of the cabinet, perpendicular to the fins
(y-z plane).
a. Click the Display tab at the top of the Mesh control panel.
c. Under Plane location, set position to X plane through center in the drop-down list.
d. Press Shift+X to orient to the positive X direction and view the newly created cut plane.
e. Move the plane using the slider bar to see different views.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 71
RF Amplifier
Make sure that the amplifier assembly is expanded and inspect the cells adjacent to the heat sink
fins. Notice that the resolution is coarse (Figure 3.21: Coarse and Fine Mesh (p. 72)), with only a
couple of cells between the fins. As the flow passes between the fins, the boundary layers will grow
and their degree of resolution will dictate the accuracy of the simulation. You want to have at least
three to four cells between the fins to adequately resolve the growth of the boundary layers. Refining
the mesh results in better resolution.
7. Select Normal in the Mesh parameters drop-down list in the Settings tab. Click Generate and inspect
the resulting mesh. Note that this has increased the number of cells between adjacent fins (Fig-
ure 3.21: Coarse and Fine Mesh (p. 72)), providing better resolution of the boundary layers.
You can display the mesh on selected objects or the cut plane by using the context menu in the
graphics window. To display the context menu, hold down the Shift key and press the right mouse
button anywhere in the graphics window. Select Display mesh or Display cut plane mesh in the
context menu and the mesh will be displayed on selected objects or the cut plane will be displayed.
It is also a good practice to select the Quality tab and review the Face Alignment, Quality, Volume,
and Skewness. The histograms show the quality metric (Face Alignment, Quality Ratio, Volume or
Skewness) versus the number of cells. Clicking the bars that form the histogram displays the cells
with that value in the graphics window.
8. Once you have explored the mesh quality, click Close to dismiss the Mesh control dialog box.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
72 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Physical and Numerical Settings
a. Click the Reset button (Figure 3.22: The Basic settings Panel (p. 73)).
The Reynolds and Peclet numbers are approximately 55000.0 and 40000.0 respectively, so the
flow is turbulent. ANSYS Icepak recommends setting the flow regime to turbulent.
Note
These values are only estimates, based on the current model setup. Actual values may
vary, and may need to be verified, depending on your design.
2. Using the Problem setup wizard, enable turbulence modeling using the zero equation turbulence
model and neglecting radiation heat transfer.
a. In the Model manager window, right-click Problem setup ( ) and then select Problem setup wizard.
Figure 3.23: Problem setup wizard panel at step 1 of 14 (p. 74) shows what appears. The Problem
setup wizard provides a simple interface with user guidance for defining the physics of the model.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 73
RF Amplifier
b. For step 1 of 14, indicated in the bottom-left corner of the Problem setup wizard panel, keep the
default settings for the check boxes. Click Next.
c. For step 2 of 14, select Flow is buoyancy driven (natural convection) as in Figure 3.24: Problem
setup wizard panel at step 2 of 14 (p. 75), since natural convection is not negligible inside the RF
amplifier. Click Next.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
74 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Physical and Numerical Settings
Extra
Hold your mouse pointer over any selection in the Problem setup wizard to have a
text bubble appear for additional information on the selection, as shown in Fig-
ure 3.24: Problem setup wizard panel at step 2 of 14 (p. 75).
d. For step 3 of 14, keep the default setting of Use Boussinesq approximation for the natural convection
model.
e. For step 4 of 14, keep the Operating pressure at the default value of 101325.0 N/m2. Select Set
gravitational acceleration and leave the default values for all directions, as shown in Figure 3.25: Prob-
lem setup wizard at step 4 of 14 (p. 76). Click Next.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 75
RF Amplifier
f. For step 5 of 14, select Set flow regime to turbulent to enable turbulence modeling, shown in Fig-
ure 3.26: Problem setup wizard at step 5 of 14 (p. 76). Click Next.
g. For step 6 of 14, select Zero equation (mixing length) to choose the zero equation turbulent model,
shown in Figure 3.27: Problem setup wizard at step 6 of 14 (p. 77). Click Next.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
76 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Physical and Numerical Settings
h. For step 7 of 14, turn off radiation by selecting Ignore heat transfer due to radiation. Click Next.
i. For step 9 of 14, keep the check box clear to ignore solar radiation. Click Next.
j. For step 10 of 14, keep the default setting of Variables do not vary with time (steady-state) for
steady-state simulation. Click Next.
k. For step 14 of 14, keep the check boxes clear to ignore altitude effects. Finally, click Done to finish
the Problem setup wizard. These settings now fully define the problem setup.
Note
You can edit these settings and other aspects of the problem setup by double-clicking
( ) Basic parameters in the Model manager window. Figure 3.28: Basic parameters
panel (p. 78) shows the Basic parameters panel that appears.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 77
RF Amplifier
3. Return to the Basic settings panel, specify the number of iterations as 300, click Reset and then Accept
again.
a. Figure 3.29: Panel of Power and temperature limit setup (p. 79) shows the required settings for the
next few steps.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
78 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 6: Save the Model
Note
ANSYS Icepak uses the default temperature limit during post-processing to identify
components that exceed their limits or components that are close to this limit. ANSYS
Icepak does not use this value to solve the problem.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 79
RF Amplifier
Note
You can click the save button ( ) in the File commands toolbar.
Note
It is good practice to monitor the solution progress for certain objects. Dragging the
object in the Model manager window and placing it in the Points folder can accomplish
this.
c. Select Edit and deselect Temperature and select Velocity (Figure 3.30: The Modify point Pan-
el (p. 80)).
d. Click Done to accept the modifications and to dismiss the per-object’s Modify point panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
80 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Calculate a Solution
a. Since this particular example has neither radiation nor blocks with joule heating, ensure that you
select Disable radiation and deselect Disable varying joule heating.
Note
Disable radiation instructs ANSYS Icepak not to calculate radiation parameters for
the model. For cases in which your model has blocks with joule heating, only then
should you select Disable varying joule heating. Otherwise, leave the option
deselected. Refer to Using the Solve Panel to Set the Solver Controls in the ANSYS
Icepak User’s Guide for more information on the settings in the Solve panel.
c. Click the Start solution button to start the solver. While iterating the solution, windows will appear
showing convergence history, Figure 3.31: Convergence Plot (p. 82) and Figure 3.32: Monitor Plot -
Temperature (p. 83).
Note
Alternatively, you can click the Run solution icon ( ) in the model and solve toolbar
to display the Run solution panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 81
RF Amplifier
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
82 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Calculate a Solution
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 83
RF Amplifier
Carefully review the solution overview and note that the solution satisfies conservation of mass and
energy (scroll to the bottom of the report). Also note the fan operating point. The solution overview is
automatically saved and can be reopened from Report → Solution overview → Create.
1. Compare the object temperature values for all sources with the temperature limits assigned.
The Power and Temperature limit setup show the default temperature limit and the resulting
maximum temperature value for each source next to them.
If an assembly is expanded in the Model manager window and if the resulting temperature of
any object exceeds the temperature limit specified, ANSYS Icepak shows all the critical objects
in red color.
Note
Ensure that the amplifier and fan assemblies are expanded, so that the fins are visible.
b. To create an object face, click the Object face icon ( ) in the shortcut toolbar.
c. In the Object drop down list, specify heatsink.1 as the object and click Accept.
d. Select Show contours and click the Parameters button (adjacent to show contours) to access the
Object face contours edit dialog box.
i. Select This object in the drop-box adjacent to Calculated to use the object-based range.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
84 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Examine the Results
Note
You can also create contours on heatsink.1 by selecting this object in the Model
manager window and right-clicking to display the context menu. Select Create>Object
face(s)>Separate and the Object face panel will appear. The Object face panel is
displayed for that particular object.
Note
Using the mouse, rotate the heat sink to examine the surface temperature distribution.
Notice that the location of the devices is clearly discernible on the bottom of the heat
sink. Also note that the devices get progressively hotter in the flow direction (Fig-
ure 3.35: Temperature Contours on the Heat Sink Object Face (p. 86)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 85
RF Amplifier
Note
Notice that face.1 has now appeared in the Model manager window in the Post-
processing folder. Right-click face.1 and note that you can make it active, edit it, or
delete it. You can move face.1 into the Inactive folder by dragging and dropping
face.1 within the Model manager window. You can make face.1 active again or
delete it by dragging it to Trash or to the Post-processing folder, as well as with the
right-click dialog.
a. To create a plane cut, click the Plane cut icon ( ) in the shortcut toolbar.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
86 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Examine the Results
b. Select the Set position as Point and normal and select Show vectors, as shown in the panel below.
Enter PX, PY, and PZ, as well as NX, NY, and NZ according to Figure 3.36: Plane cut Panel (p. 87).
You may also specify the point’s coordinates as 0.680 by using the slider at the bottom of the Plane
location box in the same panel.
d. Select Uniform in Display options group box and specify value as 5000. The Uniform option for
the velocity will uniformly place the vectors among the 5000 data points.
e. Select This object in the drop-box adjacent to Calculated and click Done to close the panel.
The vector plots are shown in the graphics window (Figure 3.37: Plane Cut of Velocity Vector
Field (p. 88)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 87
RF Amplifier
Note
Examining the vector plot, we can see that the flow pattern is symmetric, with two large
recirculating zones adjacent to the fan. Zoom into the region directly in front of the fan
and notice that two smaller recirculating zones exist in front of the hub. These local effects
can be important when objects are close to the hub region.
Note
You can move a plane cut through a model by pressing the Shift key, holding down the
middle mouse button on an edge of the plane cut and dragging the plane cut through
the model in the graphics window.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
88 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Examine the Results
4. Create isosurfaces.
b. Specify Temperature as the Variable, input a Value of 55°C, and select Show contours and click
Parameters. In the Isosurface contours panel, select Smooth for Shading options and This object
in the drop-box adjacent to Calculated. Click Done.
c. Click Update in the Isosurface panel and notice that an isosurface has been placed around all of the
sources, indicating that they have temperatures equal to 55°C (Figure 3.38: Temperature Isosurface
Contour of 55°C for Sources (p. 89)).
d. Now, change the Variable to Speed and input a Value of 4. Click Update. Notice that the regions
with velocities in excess of 4 m/s are now displayed (Figure 3.39: Temperature Contours on Isosurface
of Speed 4 m/s (p. 90)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 89
RF Amplifier
5. Utilize the Transparency slider to help visualize multiple post-processing objects simultaneously.
a. With the previously created isosurface still active, select the plane cut (cut.1) in the Model manager
window and select Active to make it visible again.
b. Edit iso.1. Select the Transparency check box, shown in Figure 3.40: Isosurface Panel with Trans-
parency Enabled (p. 91). Set the value to 0.63.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
90 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Examine the Results
c. Click Done to show the isosurface and plane cut simultaneously (Figure 3.41: Concurrent Visualization
of Semi-Transparent Isosurface and Opaque Plane cut (p. 92)). Notice the semi-transparency of the
isosurface allows the concurrent visualization of the opaque velocity flow field near the fan.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 91
RF Amplifier
Note
You can access the Transparency slider in the following post-processing objects:
Object face, Plane cut, and Isosurface.
6. Create a summary report of object-specific solution data. Summary reports can provide physical inform-
ation from the solution about specific Model objects, Groups objects, Post-processing objects and
Points objects. Follow the steps below to create a summary report:
a. First, make the post-processing object face.1 active again by accessing the context menu under the
Inactive node in the Model manager window.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
92 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Examine the Results
c. Click New in the Define summary report panel three times to create 3 rows of Objects.
d. In the first row, select object heatsink.1, then click Accept. In the Value drop-down menu, select
Heat flow.
Note
Although you did not change the default settings of the check boxes Comb and
Mesh, you may encounter projects in which you need to change these. Comb refers
to “combined”: The report generates a single, combined value for all the sides selected;
deselecting the option would report the side values separately. Mesh allows you to
report on the reduced mesh of the selected object in the case that an object intersects
with other objects and the mesh in the intersecting region might not necessarily be-
long to the object of interest.
e. In the second row, select the fan, object delta.FFB0812_24EHE, then click Accept. In the Value
drop-down menu, select Volume flow.
f. In the third row, select post face.1, then click Accept. In the Value drop-down menu, select Temper-
ature.
g. Click Write to generate a panel for the object summary report (Figure 3.42: Report summary data
Panel (p. 94)). Examine the values reported and confirm they are consistent with the physics of the
model. Click Done to exit out of this panel, then Close to exit the Define summary report panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 93
RF Amplifier
Note
Before creating the variation plots, ensure that the amplifier assembly is expanded,
so that the fins are visible. Next, press Shift+Z to orient the view in the positive Z
direction.
c. An X-Y plot of UY velocity versus Z coordinate is now visible (Figure 3.43: Variation Plot of UY Velocity
Versus Z Coordinate (p. 95)). Toggle the Symbols button and notice that the velocity profile across
the solution domain is represented with a solid line at the post-processing locations. Notice that
ANSYS Icepak creates a locally colored line according to the UY velocity magnitude, seen in the
graphics window.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
94 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Summary
i. Click the Save button at the bottom of the Variation of UY plot window.
ii. Enter a file name in the resulting Save curve dialog box.
You have now learned the basic workflow of an ANSYS Icepak project, including model building, mesh
generation, problem setup, solution calculation, and post-processing as well essential features and
functions that you will likely use in later tutorials or your own projects.
We repeat some of the tips and best practices found in this tutorial for your convenience:
1. Best Practices
a. Check the default materials, properties, and operating conditions under the Defaults tab in the
Basic parameters panel. These defaults often render some specifications unnecessary.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 95
RF Amplifier
b. Use the alignment and morph tools to position objects based on other existing objects. This can be
faster than specifying object dimensions and coordinates in many situations.
c. Use the Show objects by type feature to verify your model objects by type.
d. View the HTML summary report (View → Summary (HTML)) to ensure proper specification of
geometries, properties, and materials for each object.
e. Reduce mesh counts and consequently decrease run times in regions requiring less resolution by
creating separately meshed assemblies when appropriate. Also select suitable slack values that improve
the convergence rate while avoiding mesh bleeding.
f. Select the Allow minimum gap changes option in the Misc tab of the Mesh control panel to allow
ANSYS Icepak to avoid unnecessary meshing due to inadvertent misalignments in the model. This is
suitable for this tutorial but may not be in other projects.
g. Ensure that you have at least three to four cells between fins to resolve adequately the boundary
layers between them by visually inspecting the mesh. Refine the mesh as necessary by using Normal
meshing.
h. Evaluate your mesh quality under the Quality tab in the Mesh control panel.
i. Use the Problem setup wizard for guided problem setup. Edit the problem setup if needed using
the Basic parameters panel.
j. Judge convergence by monitoring residual levels as well as relevant integrated quantities for certain
objects with point monitors, which should eventually stop changing significantly with more iterations.
a. Explore the several methods to complete a task as you work through a problem in ANSYS Icepak.
For example, you can edit model object geometries by using their object edit panel, or you can use
the Edit window in the bottom right-hand corner while having the object node selected in the
Model manager window. Use the options best suited for you to help streamline your workflow.
b. Cycle through all possible edges in the Morph edges mode by repeatedly clicking the left mouse
button. This is useful in case you have difficulty selecting an edge.
c. Remove object names by clicking the Display object names button ( ) to reduce visual clutter in
the graphics window.
d. Highlight critical regions using the Power and temperature limits feature (Model → Power and
temperature limits) to designate maximum power and temperature, which can then be highlighted
in the graphics window after the solution calculation (Post → Power and temperature values).
Note that setting these limits does not affect how ANSYS Icepak calculates the solution.
e. Use the Reset button in the Basic settings panel to have ANSYS Icepak estimate dimensionless
numbers (for example, the Reynolds and Peclet numbers for forced convection) and determine the
appropriate flow regime.
f. Hold your mouse pointer over any selection in the Problem setup wizard to have a text bubble
appear for additional information on the selection.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
96 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Summary
g. Use the Transparency slider in the post-processing object edit panels to improve visualization of
post-processing objects.
h. Move a plane cut through a model by pressing the Shift key, holding down the middle mouse button
on an edge of the plane cut and dragging the plane cut through the model in the graphics window.
i. Expand all of your assemblies quickly by right-clicking Model in the Model manager window then
selecting Expand all.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 97
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
98 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 4: Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
4.1. Introduction
The purpose of this tutorial is to demonstrate ANSYS Icepak parametric and optimization features with
the help of a small system level model.
• Define a variable as a parameter and solve the parametric trials to optimize your model for maximum
performance.
The tutorial will guide you through the usual workflow with additional steps specific to this exercise:
creating a project, building the model, creating separately meshed assemblies, generating a mesh, setting
up parametric trials, creating point monitors, problem setup, calculating solutions, post-processing, as
well as an additional exercise to model the effects of higher altitude on the system.
4.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have little experience with ANSYS Icepak, but that you are generally fa-
miliar with the interface. If you are not, review Sample Session in the Icepak User’s Guide and the tutorial
Finned Heat Sink of this guide as some of the steps that were discussed in these tutorials will not be
repeated here.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 99
Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
When ANSYS Icepak starts, the Welcome to Icepak panel opens automatically.
2. Click New in the Welcome to Icepak panel to start a new ANSYS Icepak project.
3. Specify a name for your project (for example, fan_locations) and click Create.
ANSYS Icepak creates a default cabinet with the dimensions 1 m × 1 m × 1 m, and displays the
cabinet in the graphics window. You will modify this cabinet in the next section.
The cabinet forms the boundary of your computational model. Press the isometric view icon ( )
for a 3D view. Select Cabinet in the Model manager window and enter the location values as shown
in the geometry window below. The geometry window can be found in the lower right hand corner
of the GUI.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
100 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Click the Create fans icon ( ) in the object toolbar next to the Model manager window to create
a 2D intake circular fan on one side of the cabinet. Change the plane to yz and enter the location
values shown in the geometry window below:
One of the objectives of this exercise is to parameterize the location of the fan. To create a para-
metric variable in ANSYS Icepak, input a $ sign followed by the variable name. Thus, to create
the parametric variable “zc”, type $zc in the zC box in addition to the other location values, and
click Apply. When ANSYS Icepak asks you for an initial value of “zc", enter an initial value of 0.1,
and click Done.
We will now set the physical properties that will define the fan behavior:
b. In the Properties tab, retain the selection of Intake for Fan type and select Non-linear in the Fan
flow tab.
c. Enter the characteristic curve by clicking on the Edit button and selecting Text Editor in the drop-
down list in the Non-linear curve group box.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 101
Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
d. First change the units of the volume flow rate and pressure according to the units in Table 4.1: Values
for the Curve Specification Panel (p. 102) and enter the values in pairs with a space between them in
the Curve specification panel.
Note
Pay attention to the two zero values in Table 4.1: Values for the Curve Specification
Panel (p. 102). In general, you should start a fan curve specification with a zero flow
rate and end the specification with a zero pressure.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
102 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
f. Select the Edit button again in the Non-linear curve group box and click Graph Editor in the drop-
down list to view the fan curve (Figure 4.4: The Fan Curve Panel (p. 103) ).
h. In the Properties tab, set the fan to an RPM (revolutions per minute) of 4000 in the Swirl tab, located
next to the Fan flow tab.
i. In the Properties tab, set the Operating RPM of 2000 in the Options tab, located next to the Swirl
tab.
Note
The RPM under the Swirl tab specifies the nominal RPM of the fan from the existing
fan curve. The Operating RPM in the Options tab is a working RPM value used in
conjunction with the nominal RPM to dynamically scale and update the fan curve
according to the fan laws. The nominal RPM can also be used to compute the swirl
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 103
Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
factor. Refer to Chapter 21: Fans in the User’s Guide for more information regarding
fan objects.
Now the model looks as shown in Figure 4.5: Model with Fan (p. 104).
Extra
The shading of the fan object can be changed by changing the Shading option under
the Info tab to change the shading of just that object, or by leaving it as default and
changing the default shading option by going to View → Default shading to change
the shading of all objects that have default shading selected.
3. Set up a grille.
a. Click the Create grille icon ( ) for creating a new grille, set its plane to Y-Z. Then, using the Morph
faces ( ) option move the grille to the max-X face of the cabinet. After clicking the icon ( ), the
graphics display window presents step by step instructions on how to use the Morph faces option.
Alternatively, you can use the coordinates shown in the geometry window below:
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
104 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
b. Now define properties for the grill by clicking the Properties tab.
Note
i. For the Velocity loss coefficient, keep the default selection of Automatic.
Note
The free area ratio is the ratio of the area through which the fluid can flow unob-
structed to the total planar area of the obstruction. ANSYS Icepak calculates the
loss coefficient of the grille based on the free area ratio. Different resistance types
govern the method of calculation. See Pressure Drop Calculations for Grilles in the
User’s Guide for more information on the free area ratio and the various pressure
drop calculation methods.
iii. Retain Perforated thin vent for the Resistance type. Refer to Figure 4.6: Grille Panel (Properties
Tab) (p. 106) for the correct settings.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 105
Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
For more details on loss coefficient data, refer to Handbook of Hydraulic Resistance, by I. E. Idelchick.
The model looks as shown in Figure 4.7: Model with Fan and Grille (p. 107).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
106 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
4. Set up a wall.
Note
The model includes a 0.01 m thick PCB that touches and covers the entire min-Y floor
of the cabinet. The PCB is exposed to the outside with a known heat flux of 20 W/m2. In
order to consider the heat flux, we will use a wall object to simulate the PCB.
a. Click the Create walls icon ( ) to create a new wall. We will define the geometry and physical
parameters for the wall object:
ii. Use the Morph faces icon ( ) from the model toolbar to align the wall object with the entire
min-Y floor of the cabinet.
Note
If you have difficulty selecting faces, try clicking near the edge of a face. Clicking
correctly should highlight the entire face in red.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 107
Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
iv. In the Material group box, set the Wall thickness to 0.01 m and the Solid material to FR-4.
v. In the Thermal specification group box, specify a Heat flux of 20 W/m2. See Figure 4.8: Walls
Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 108) for the correct settings.
After creating the wall, the model looks as shown in Figure 4.9: Model with Wall Added (p. 109).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
108 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
5. Create blocks.
In this step, you will create several types of blocks to represent different physics.
Now, create four blocks that dissipate 5 W each and have a contact resistance of 0.005 C/W on
their bottom faces.
a. Create a new block ( ) , and retain the Type as solid and Geom as Prism. Enter the location
values shown in the panel below:
b. Edit the block and specify the following in the Properties tab:
i. In the Surface specification group box, click the Individual sides check box and click Edit
(Figure 4.10: The Individual side specification (p. 110)).
B. Under Thermal condition, retain the selection of Fixed heat and Total power of 0 W.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 109
Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
ii. In the Thermal specification group box in the Properties tab, retain the selection of default
for Solid Material (you can also select Al-Extruded which is the default).
Extra
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
110 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Create four IC chips in the form of network blocks. To create a network block, create a Block object
and change the block type to Network in the Properties tab. Each network block has junction-
to-board, junction-to-case, and junction-to-sides thermal resistances. The values of these resistances
are known beforehand.
→ Enter the Network parameters as shown in Figure 4.12: The Properties Panel (p. 112).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 111
Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
c. Now make three copies of this network block with an X offset of 0.08 m. This finishes the creation
of the network blocks.
Note
Finally, to cut out a section of the cabinet from the computational domain, create a
hollow block. This represents a region that does not directly affect heat transfer via
solid conduction but that does, however, alter the flow patterns surrounding this region.
e. Click Accept. This is just to demonstrate the use of local coordinate system.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
112 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
6. Now we will create the detailed heat sink. The heat sink base acts as a heat spreader for all the chips.
a. Click the Create heat sinks icon ( ) and edit it. In the Properties tab, select Detailed in the Type
drop-down menu. Entering its location and properties as shown in the following table:
Geometry
Plane: X-Z
xS / xE: 0.05/0.34
yS / yE: 0.03/—
zS / zE: 0.1/0.23
Base height: 0.01 m
Overall height: 0.06 m
Properties
Type: Detailed
Flow Direction: X
Detailed Fin type: Bonded fin
Fin setup
Fin spec: Count/thickness
Count: 8
Thickness: 0.008 m
Flow/thermal data
Fin material: default
Base material: Cu-Pure
Interface
Fin bonding: Click the Edit button
Effective thickness: 0.0002 m
Solid material: default
b. Click Update and Done. This completes the model building process. The complete model should
look like that shown in Figure 4.13: Final Model (p. 114).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 113
Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
7. Check the definition of the modeling objects to ensure that you have specified them properly.
The summary report now appears in a web browser. The summary displays a list of all the objects
in the model and all the parameters that have been set for each object. You can view the detailed
version of the summary by clicking the appropriate object names or property specifications. If you
notice any incorrect specifications, you can return to the appropriate modeling object panel and
change the settings in the same way that you originally entered them.
Note
The summary report also shows the user-specified material properties for each of
the objects to help identify the proper material specifications. Figure 4.14: Partial
Table of Summary Report for Blocks (p. 115) shows the summary report for block.1,
which includes its material specifications.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
114 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Creating Separately Meshed Assemblies
1. To create the first assembly, first highlight all the blocks (except the hollow block) and the heat sink
object in the Model manager window, then right-click them and choose Create and then Assembly.
2. Right-click and select Rename from the menu. Rename the assembly, as Heatsink-packages-asy.
3. To build the “bounding box" for the assembly called Heatsink-packages-asy, double-click it to edit the
assembly.
4. In the Meshing tab of the Assemblies panel, toggle Mesh separately, and then set the Slack parameters
as the following:
Note
• Note that for the Heatsink-packages-asy, we have set a bounding box that is 0.005 m bigger
than the assembly at five sides except Max X where the slack is defined higher (0.015 m)
to capture the wake region of the flow.
5. Click Update and Done to complete the bounding box specifications for the assembly.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 115
Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
Following the same procedure above, create one more assembly for the fan object (name it Fan-
asy). Use the following table to assign the Slack values for the Fan-asy assembly.
1. Open the Mesh control panel, keep the default values for the mesh settings and ensure that Mesh as-
semblies separately is selected.
2. Click Generate. You may get a warning about minimum separation if the Allow minimum gap changes
option is deselected in the Misc tab.
Extra
This warning appears because the Minimum gap (separation), which is like a tolerance
setting for the mesher, is larger than 10% of the smallest feature in the model. When
there are objects smaller than the mesher tolerance, those objects will not be meshed
correctly. To avoid this, you need to change the value to modify the minimum gap to
10% of the smallest object. The prompt window that appears allows you to do this with
the Change value and mesh option. This option is used for this particular tutorial and
may not be applicable all the time. As the mesh separation setting is a useful tool designed
to avoid unnecessary meshing due to inadvertent misalignments in the model (without
modifying the geometry), we may use other options suitable to the model.
4. Examine the mesh by taking plane cuts in all directions under the Display tab.
5. Go to the Mesh control panel, click the Quality tab and examine Face alignment (Figure 4.15: Graph
of Face alignment (p. 117)). Due to differences among different machines, your numbers may not be exactly
the same as those of Figure 4.15: Graph of Face alignment (p. 117).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
116 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Setting up the Multiple Trials
Note
Recall from previous examples that Figure 4.15: Graph of Face alignment (p. 117) is a graph
of cell number versus face alignment. For more information on face alignment as a
measure of mesh quality, see Checking the Face Alignment from the Icepak User’s Guide.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 117
Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
c. Select the Design variables tab and next to Discrete values, type 0.165 following 0.1, separated
by a space as shown in the Figure 4.16: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Design variables
Tab) (p. 118):
Figure 4.16: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Design variables Tab)
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
118 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Setting up the Multiple Trials
d. Click Apply.
Note
After the first trial has been completed, ANSYS Icepak has the option of starting the fol-
lowing trial(s) from the default initial conditions specified in Problem setup panel, or
from the solution(s) of the trial run(s) that have completed.
For this model, next go to the Trials tab and ensure the Restart ID is blank for the 2nd trial as
shown in Figure 4.17: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Trials Tab) (p. 119). This instructs ANSYS
Icepak to start the 2nd run from the default initial conditions.
2. Click Reset button and select Values to use the base names for trial naming. Note that resetting auto-
matically selects tr_zc_0_1 for the second trial’s Restart ID. Delete this entry to make it blank again.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 119
Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
1. Enter 200 in the Number of iterations field in the Basic settings panel (Figure 4.19: The Basic settings
Panel (p. 121)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
120 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Physical and Numerical Setting
2. Click Reset. In the message window. ANSYS Icepak recommends setting the flow regime to turbulent
based on the approximate Reynolds and Peclet numbers.
Use the Problem setup wizard to set up the basic parameters of the problem.
1. Right-click Problem setup in the Model manager window and select Problem setup wizard.
2. Follow the instructions as the Problem setup wizard panel guides you.
Important
Do the following in the wizard (keep the rest of the settings at default): Select forced
convection, set the flow regime to turbulent, use the zero equation turbulence model,
include radiation heat transfer, and use the surface-to-surface radiation model.
3. Click Done when the panel is at step 14 of 14 to finish your problem setup.
Note
You can edit the problem setup by expanding Problem setup in the Model manager
window, then double-clicking Basic parameters ( ). Figure 4.20: The Basic parameters
Panel (p. 122) shows the panel that appears.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 121
Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
In the Results tab of the Solve panel that appears, enable Write overview of results when finished,
then click Dismiss to close the Solve panel. The Solve panel is used for single trials only; therefore, the
solution can only be calculated from the Parameters and optimization panel.
In the Parameters and optimization panel that appears (Figure 4.17: The Parameters and optimization
Panel (Trials Tab) (p. 119)), click Run to calculate a solution for both trials.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
122 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 10: Examine the Results
Select the solution that corresponds to the first (parametric) run: zC = 0.1. If you want to view objects
inside the assemblies, you can open all the model nodes by right-clicking Model in the Model manager
window and selecting Expand all. Use the various post-processing features available in ANSYS Icepak
to display your solution. A description of how to generate plane cut and object face views can be found
in Step 7: Examine the Results of the Finned Heat Sink tutorial. In particular, use the following views:
1. Plane cut panel to display the velocity vectors on a plane through the cabinet
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 123
Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
Important
To view the 2nd parametric run, click the Post menu and select Load solution ID.
Select the solution that corresponds to the second parametric run: zC = 0.165. The
graphics display window updates automatically.
2. Object face panel to display temperature contours on wall.1 and on all blocks
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
124 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 10: Examine the Results
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 125
Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
Examine the solution sets of both runs. You will find that, in the second run, the maximum temper-
ature is lower than in the first run and that the network blocks are the hottest objects inside the
cabinet. The second trial has the fan located at zC= 0.165 which is closer to the heat sink location.
This increases the flow velocity over the heat sinks and thus increases the convective heat transfer
coefficient, which leads to more heat transfer from the fins (blocks) and thus reduces the maximum
temperature.
At the end of the runs, ANSYS Icepak automatically displays an overview report because you selected
Write overview of results when finished in the Solve panel. This report has:
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
126 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 12: Summary
Examine these results. Go to the Report menu and then select Solution overview and click View
to display the desired overview report.
2. Summary Report
You can also create a single summary report containing the results of all the trial runs completed.
Go to the Solve menu and select Define report. In the Define summary report panel, under ID
pattern, enter the default filter, "*", which selects all the available solution IDs. Click New and then
hold down Ctrl. Select block.1, block.1.1., block.2, block.2.1, and block.3 from the
drop-down menu under Objects, click Accept and then click Write. Verify that the second trial gives
lower maximum and mean temperatures.
We repeat some of the tips and best practices found in this tutorial for your convenience:
1. Best Practices
a. Start a fan curve specification with a zero flow rate and end the specification with a zero pressure.
b. View the HTML summary report (View → Summary (HTML)) to ensure proper specification of
geometries, properties, and materials for each object.
c. Reduce mesh counts and consequently decrease run times in regions requiring less resolution by
creating separately meshed assemblies when appropriate. Also select suitable slack values that improve
the convergence rate while avoiding mesh bleeding.
d. Select the Allow minimum gap changes option in the Misc tab of the Mesh control panel to allow
ANSYS Icepak to avoid unnecessary meshing due to inadvertent misalignments in the model. This is
suitable for this tutorial but may not be in other projects.
e. Create monitor points of relevant quantities (temperature, pressure, or velocity) to help judge conver-
gence alongside residuals.
f. Use the Problem setup wizard for guided problem setup. Edit the problem setup if needed using
the Basic parameters panel.
a. Use the RPM under the Swirl tab as a fan's nominal RPM. Use the Operating RPM in the Options
tab as the working RPM value, used in conjunction with the nominal RPM to update the fan curve
according to the fan laws.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 127
Use of Parameterization to Optimize Fan Location
b. Display different types of shading to help visualize parts of your model better by editing an individual
object in the Model manager window or by applying it globally (View → Default shading).
c. Click near the edge of a face in the Morph faces mode if you have difficulty selecting faces. Clicking
correctly should highlight the entire face in a red shading.
Note
Use the left mouse button first to select a face, then accept the selection with the
middle mouse button. Right-click to cancel your selection or to exit the Morph faces
mode.
d. Create hollow blocks to cut out a section of the cabinet from the computational domain. Hollow
blocks only alter flow patterns and do not participate in solid conduction heat transfer.
e. Use the appropriate Restart ID for your trials' initial conditions when running a parametric optimization
to improve convergence rate.
In the Model manager window, select Problem setup → Basic parameters and assign the new
air material to the default fluid.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
128 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 13: Additional Exercise to Model Higher Altitude Effect
In addition, in the Fan flow section of the Fans Properties tab, you must modify all the defined fan
curves by multiplying the existing pressures times the ratio of densities (the density of air at 3000 m /
the density of air at 0 m), which in this case is less than 1. Use the values in Figure 4.25: Updating Fan
Curves to Account for Altitude Effects (p. 129) for this modification. Finally, the model is ready for running
to account for the effects of higher altitude.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 129
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
130 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 5: Cold-Plate Model with Non-Conformal Meshing
5.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates how to model a cold-plate using ANSYS Icepak.
• Use the meshing priorities of different objects to mesh complicated model setups in ANSYS Icepak.
5.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have reviewed Sample Session in the Icepak User’s Guide and tutorials
Finned Heat Sink and RF Amplifier of this guide.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 131
Cold-Plate Model with Non-Conformal Meshing
The objective of this exercise is to illustrate the use of two different fluids in ANSYS Icepak. The model
includes two heated plates, cooled by water circulating inside the cold-plate cavity, as well as by air
driven by natural convection externally. Separately meshed assemblies will be employed to reduce the
overall mesh count in the domain. The model will be constructed using the default metric unit system.
• Cabinet ( )
Enter the following start and end locations for the cabinet:
xS 0.0 m xE 0.4 m
yS 0.0 m yE 0.3 m
zS 0.0 m zE 0.2 m
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
132 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
• Blocks ( )
Create a solid block, block.1, and a fluid block, block.2, with the specifications in Table 5.2: Specific-
ations of block.1 and block.2 (p. 133). Note the specified materials for each block.
Object
Name: block.1 xS 0.05 m xE 0.35 m
Geometry: Prism yS 0.08 m yE 0.22 m
Block type: Solid zS 0.07 m zE 0.13 m
Solid material:
Al-Extruded
Because you have created block.2 after block.1, block.2 has a higher relative meshing priority.
Note
ANSYS Icepak meshes the objects according to their mesh priority; this is important when
intersection between two or more objects occurs. If two or more objects intersect, you
may not obtain the correct results with the default meshing priority. The ascending order
of the model object nodes in the model manager window determines the mesh priority
of the corresponding model objects. For example, the model object in the bottom node
has the highest meshing priority. For more information on controlling meshing priority,
see Controlling the Meshing Order for Objects in the ANSYS Icepak User’s Guide.
Note
Because Al-Extruded is set as the Default solid in the Defaults tab of the Basic paramet-
ers panel, you can leave the material selection as default while creating the object instead
of selecting the material each time when an object is being created.
Next, create 4 cylindrical blocks. While editing cylindrical blocks, first select the block shape as cylinder,
then select the desired plane and finally enter the dimensions.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 133
Cold-Plate Model with Non-Conformal Meshing
Name: 0.3 0.0 0.1 0.09 0.015 0.0 m Block type: Solid
block.4 m m m m m
Geometry: Solid material: Al-Extruded
Cylinder
Plane: X-Z
Name: 0.1 0.0 0.1 0.09 0.01 0.0 m Block type: Fluid
block.5 m m m m m
Geometry: Fluid material: Water(@280K)
Cylinder
Plane: X-Z
Name: 0.3 0.0 0.1 0.09 0.01 0.0 m Block type: Fluid
block.6 m m m m m
Geometry: Fluid material: Water(@280K)
Cylinder
Plane: X-Z
Because the fluid blocks, block.5 and block.6, are created after the solid blocks, they will have
higher relative meshing priorities.
Note
An alternative way to build the cylinders would be to create the solid block, block.3, and
then the fluid block, block.5, group these together, and then copy them with an offset of
0.2 in the X direction. Note that the naming of the cylinders will not be consistent with
the tutorial. However, you could rename the objects to their corresponding names in the
tutorial by right-clicking each copied object in the Model manager window and selecting
Rename.
• Plates ( )
Object Specifications
Name: plate.1 xS 0.07 m xE 0.33 m Thermal model:
Conducting thick
(0.01 m)
Geometry: yS 0.1 m yE 0.2 m Total power:
Rectangular 200 W
Plane: X-Y zS 0.06 m zE —
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
134 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Solid materi-
al: Al-Extruded
Note
• Openings ( )
The openings at the liquid inflow and outflow regions of the cold-plate are:
Note
You could also have made a copy of the outlet opening (opening.1) with an X offset of
0.2 m along with a specified Y Velocity = 0.2 m/s to create the inlet opening (opening.2).
For agreement with the tutorial, ensure that you have placed the inlet and outlet in their
correct positions by referring to Figure 5.1: The Cold-Plate Model (p. 132).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 135
Cold-Plate Model with Non-Conformal Meshing
The openings at the cabinet boundary for external air natural convection are:
Object
Name: opening.3 xS 0.4 m xE —
Type: Free yS 0.0 m yE 0.3 m
Geometry: Rectan- zS 0.2 m zE 0.0 m
gular
Plane: Y-Z
Note
Instead of creating the openings, opening.3 and opening.4 above, you could have edited
Cabinet and changed the wall type on the Min x and Max x faces to Opening. Note,
however, that you cannot rename the two resulting objects.
See Figure 5.1: The Cold-Plate Model (p. 132) for the final model.
Note
Figure 5.1: The Cold-Plate Model (p. 132) displays different opacity, shading and color of
some objects to make the objects easier to see.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
136 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Generate a Mesh
The bounding box of the assembly is larger than the original assembly by 0.01 m on five sides. The
slack value for the min Y side of the assembly is set to be 0 m, since the min Y side of the assembly is
at the bottom surface of the cabinet. Click Update and Done to complete editing the separately meshed
assembly.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 137
Cold-Plate Model with Non-Conformal Meshing
for the X, Y, and Z counts for the mesh in the fluid block, as shown in the following figure. Click Done
to close the Per-object meshing parameters panel.
Note
The X, Y, and Z "counts" are also known as element counts, the number of divisions into
which an edge is subdivided. In other words, an element count is the number of elements
that lie along the edge. For more information on per-object meshing parameters, see
Definitions of Object-Specific Meshing Parameters in the ANSYS Icepak User’s Guide.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
138 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Physical and Numerical Settings
Click Generate to mesh the model. Visualize the mesh at plane cuts and surface displays from the
Display tab. Note that if you have Selected object selected, you can only generate surface and volume
mesh displays on the objects themselves and not an assembly. You may select several objects in order
for several concurrent displays or you may select All to generate mesh displays for all objects automat-
ically.
Caution
Using the Reset button in the Basic settings panel to determine flow regime will give
dimensionless numbers based on the default fluid material from the Basic parameters
panel, which in this case is Air. Therefore, exercise caution when relying on ANSYS Icepak
to determine the Reynolds number.
Note
Instead of accessing the Basic parameters panel, you can instead use the Problem setup
wizard to define your problem setup by double-clicking Problem setup in the Model
manager window. See Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings in the Icepak Tutorials of the
Finned Heat Sink tutorial for more instruction regarding the Problem setup wizard. You
must still use the same settings described in this tutorial for the Problem setup wizard.
To set up turbulent flow, go to Problem setup → Basic parameters and choose the Zero
equation turbulence model for the Flow regime in the General setup tab.
Gravity acts in the negative x direction in this problem. To setup the effects of gravity, toggle the
Gravity vector in the General setup tab. Enter the new values for the Gravity vector as X = -9.80665
m/s2, Y = 0.0 m/s2, and Z = 0.0 m/s2. Now go to the Transient setup tab and set an initial X velocity
of 0.005 m/s in the X direction. Accept all other defaults in the Basic parameters panel. These are
shown in Figure 5.3: Switching on Gravity and Turbulent Flow (p. 140).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 139
Cold-Plate Model with Non-Conformal Meshing
Note
For steady-state natural convection cases, set a small initial velocity opposite to the gravity
vector direction as this assists with the initial convergence of the model. For cases in which
there is no forced convection, clicking on Reset in the Solution settings → Basic
settings menu automatically sets a small initial velocity in the direction opposite to the
gravity vector. This may not be necessary in this model though, because the flow will be
forced through the cold plate. We will have mixed (forced and natural) convection heat
transfer.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
140 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Physical and Numerical Settings
Select the Basic settings panel from the Solution settings branch of the tree and set the Number of
iterations to 300. Go to Advanced settings and make sure Under-relaxation factors for Pressure,
Momentum, and Temperature are 0.3, 0.7, and 1.0, respectively. Change the Stabilization under
Joule heating potential to BCGSTAB, and select Double for the Precision drop-down list. The recom-
mended basic settings and advanced solver setup for this model are shown in Figure 5.4: Basic and
Advanced Solver Settings (p. 141).
Add three monitor points to the Points folder, one to monitor the velocity at the center of the opening.1
(outlet opening), and two to monitor the temperature at the center of block.2 and plate.2, respectively.
The easiest way to create them is to select the objects from the Model manager window and then
drag them to the Points folder of the tree. ANSYS Icepak will then automatically monitor values at the
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 141
Cold-Plate Model with Non-Conformal Meshing
centers of these objects. The default setting is to monitor Temperature. To change this, double-click
the object under the Points folder and choose which variables to monitor at that location.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
142 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Summary
cut.2 Set position: X plane through center Observe the flow pattern in positive X direction.
Show particle traces/ Parameters Animate the particle traces.
Color variable: Speed
Display options: Uniform: 30
Particle options: Keep all the defaults
Style: Trail (Width = 1) and
Marker (cone )
Color levels: Calculated/ This Object
cut.3 Set position: Y plane through center Due to the nature of the problem, the temperature
Show contours of Temperature. distribution is symmetric on the Y-Z plane. Verify
this in the solution.
You can save the post-processing objects that you just created by clicking Save post objects to file
option in the Post menu. ANSYS Icepak will save these objects under the file named post_objects in
the Icepak project folder.
We repeat some of the tips and best practices found in this tutorial for your convenience:
1. Best Practices
a. Use the alignment and morph tools to position objects based on other existing objects. This can be
faster than specifying object dimensions and coordinates in many situations.
b. Reduce mesh counts and consequently decrease run times in regions requiring less resolution by
creating separately meshed assemblies when appropriate. Also select suitable slack values that improve
the convergence rate while avoiding mesh bleeding.
c. Use the Problem setup wizard for guided problem setup. Edit the problem setup if needed using
the Basic parameters panel.
d. Create monitor points of relevant quantities (temperature, pressure, or velocity) to help judge conver-
gence alongside residuals.
a. Copy similar objects then edit the copied objects to the desired specifications to eliminate redund-
ancies. This may be faster than creating every object individually.
b. Display different types of shading to help visualize parts of your model better by editing an individual
object in the Model manager window or by applying it globally (View → Default shading).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 143
Cold-Plate Model with Non-Conformal Meshing
c. Exercise caution when using the Reset button in the Basic settings panel to determine the flow
regime. ANSYS Icepak only provides estimates, which may not necessarily be the correct value for
your application. In some cases, you may want to perform a hand calculation to confirm.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
144 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 6: Heat-Pipe Modeling and Nested Non-Conformal Meshing
6.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates how to model simple heat pipes and an active heat sink using ANSYS Icepak.
• Use of copy mirror and copy translate functions to create an array of objects.
6.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have little experience with ANSYS Icepak, but that you are generally fa-
miliar with the interface. If you are not, review Sample Session in the Icepak User’s Guide and the tutorial
Finned Heat Sink of this guide. Some steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown ex-
plicitly.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 145
Heat-Pipe Modeling and Nested Non-Conformal Meshing
2. Start ANSYS Icepak, as described in Starting ANSYS Icepak in the Icepak User’s Guide.
Note
ANSYS Icepak can be started in ANSYS Workbench using the import .tzr feature or it can
be opened as a stand-alone product.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
146 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
4. In the File selection panel, select the packed project file heat-pipe-nested-NC.tzr and click Open.
5. In the Location for the unpacked project file selection dialog, select a directory where you would like
to place the packed project file, enter a project name in the New project text field, then click Unpack.
Note
In ANSYS Icepak, the packed file feature compresses a model to the files needed to build,
mesh and run the model (job, model, and problem files). In many of the tutorials, part of the
model is already created and packed to speed up the learning process. The model originally
has three blocks and only block.1 has an assigned power (25 W). The model also has one
fan and one grille. Next, build a heat sink in the area of the fan, grille and the heat pipe
system to connect block.1 to the heat sink.
1. Create materials utilizing ANSYS Icepak’s orthotropic material conductivity feature. The idea is to have
a material that has very high conductivity in the pipe heat removal directions but normal conductivity
in the other directions.
• Click the material icon ( ) in the object toolbar for each new material to be created.
• Right-click the material name and select Edit or double-click the material name to open the Edit
panel.
• Go to the Properties tab and make sure to toggle Material type to be Solid and set the Conductivity
type to be Orthotropic from the drop-down list.
• Deselect the Edit check box next to Conductivity and create the following materials with orthotropic
conductivity properties using the template in Figure 6.2: Orthotropic Material Properties (p. 148).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 147
Heat-Pipe Modeling and Nested Non-Conformal Meshing
The above materials have “orthotropic conductivity”, which means conductivity is different per
orthogonal direction. The effective conductivity in each orthogonal direction is equal to the
nominal conductivity multiplied by the orthotropic multiplier in that direction.
2. After creating these heat pipe materials, we build the heat pipe made of cylindrical blocks and square
joints.
• Use the values in the following table (be sure to note the geometry)
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
148 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Note
You can use the Copy object function to speed up the creation of the remaining objects
after pipe1 and joint1 are created. However, the names will not be the same as the
tutorial. To rename an object, right-click the object in the Model manager window
and click Rename.
3. Next, we will also build the heat sink using block objects.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 149
Heat-Pipe Modeling and Nested Non-Conformal Meshing
Note that the Nonuniform check box is available in the Edit window. Alternatively, you may find
it also named Nonuniform radius in the Geometry tab of the Blocks panel as shown below. The
Plane option is X-Z (Figure 6.3: Nonuniform Cylinder (p. 150)).
• Make two copies of Pin with an offset of 0.033 m in the Z direction (Number of copies = 2, Translate
with Z offset = 0.033 m).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
150 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
• Highlight the three tapered fins (Pin, Pin.1 and Pin.2), make four copies of this highlighted group with
an offset of 0.033 m in the X direction (Number of copies = 4, Translate with X offset = 0.033
m).
• Group all the pins by highlighting them in the Model manager window, right-click and select Copy
and finally make one copy as follows: Number of copies = 1, Translate with Y offset = -0.03, Mirror
with Plane: XZ and About: Low end.
The final model should appear as shown in Figure 6.4: Model with Heat Pipe and Heat Sink (p. 151).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 151
Heat-Pipe Modeling and Nested Non-Conformal Meshing
1. Create three individual assemblies (one for the heat sink and the base, the second one for the vent, and
the last one for the fan).
a. Highlight all the pins and the base in the model manager window.
Note
For the Heatsink-asy, you have set a bounding box that is 0.005 m bigger than the
assembly at five sides except Min Z where the slack is defined higher (0.015 m) to
capture the wake region of the flow. Also keep in mind that on the face Min Z is
where the wake occurs because the fan is of type Exhaust rather than of type Intake.
h. Following the same procedure above, create two more assemblies; one for vent.1 (name it Vent-asy)
and one for the fan (name it Fan-asy).
i. Use the following tables to assign slack values for Vent-asy and Fan-asy assemblies, respectively.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
152 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Generate a Mesh
2. Put the previously created assemblies into an outer assembly covering all.
a. Highlight all the three assemblies above and right-click your selection.
1. Go to Model → Generate Mesh or use the toolbar shortcut ( ) to open the Mesh control panel.
2. In the Mesh control panel, specify a global maximum element size of 0.025 m in all three directions
(Max X size = Max Y size = Max Z size = 0.025).
3. Verify that the Coarse option is selected next to Mesh parameters and change the Max size ratio from
10 to 5.
5. Under the Options tab, set the Init element height to 0.003.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 153
Heat-Pipe Modeling and Nested Non-Conformal Meshing
6. Click Generate. Visualize the mesh by making plane cuts and surface displays under the Display tab,
especially between the heat sink pins and on the surface of the fan and grille objects. The meshing
panel should look like the one in Figure 6.5: Mesh control Panel (p. 154) when finished.
Note
Instead of accessing the Basic parameters panel, you can instead use the Problem setup
wizard to define your problem setup by double-clicking Problem setup in the model
manager window. See 2.7. Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings of the Finned Heat Sink
tutorial for more instruction regarding the Problem setup wizard. You must still use the
same settings described in this tutorial for the Problem setup wizard.
1. Go to Problem setup → Basic parameters. In the General setup tab, change the Flow regime
to be Turbulent and keep the default selection of Zero equation.
2. Go to the Transient setup tab and set the initial condition for the velocity in the Z direction to be -0.1
m/s to achieve faster convergence. If there is an initial guess at the start of the solution there is less of
a chance of excessively large initial velocities in the first iteration.
Figure 6.6: Turbulent Flow and Initial Z Velocity (p. 155) shows these two steps. Click Accept for these
changes to take effect.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
154 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Physical and Numerical Settings
3. Under Solution settings → Basic settings, set the Number of iterations to 200 (Figure 6.7: Basic
settings Panel (p. 155)).
4. Click Accept.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 155
Heat-Pipe Modeling and Nested Non-Conformal Meshing
a. Select vent.1 and block.1 from the list and then drag them to the Points branch of the tree. (Altern-
atively, one can create monitor points by simply selecting these objects in the Model manager
window, clicking on the right mouse button and selecting Create and then Monitor point.)
b. Because ANSYS Icepak will by default monitor the temperature at the centroid or center of these
objects, double-click vent.1 under the monitor Points branch.
2. Go to Solve → Run solution or click the shortcut button ( ). Start the solver by clicking Start solution.
cut.1 1. Go to the Plane location box Plane cut (X-Z) view of the velocity vector field.
2. Set position: Y plane through center
Observations: The view shows air flowing from
3. Click and drag the slider to around the vent to the fan as the air passes through the
0.800 array of fins.
4. Select Show vectors
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
156 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Examine the Results
5. Click Parameters
6. Color by: Velocity magnitude
The post-processing objects face.1 and cut.1 should look similar to Figure 6.8: Temperature Contours
on All Blocks (face.1) (p. 157) and Figure 6.9: Velocity Vector Field Around Fan and Heat Sink (cut.1) (p. 158).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 157
Heat-Pipe Modeling and Nested Non-Conformal Meshing
Figure 6.9: Velocity Vector Field Around Fan and Heat Sink (cut.1)
We repeat some of the tips and best practices found in this tutorial for your convenience:
1. Best Practices
a. Reduce mesh counts and consequently decrease run times in regions requiring less resolution by
creating separately meshed assemblies when appropriate. Also select suitable slack values that improve
the convergence rate while avoiding mesh bleeding.
b. Increase slack values for faces with a wake region if using a separately meshed assembly. Do this to
model the wake more accurately.
c. Use the Problem setup wizard for guided problem setup. Edit the problem setup if needed using
the Basic parameters panel.
d. Create monitor points of relevant quantities (temperature, pressure, or velocity) to help judge conver-
gence alongside residuals.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
158 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Summary
a. Copy similar objects then edit the copied objects to the desired specifications to eliminate redundan-
cies. This may be faster than creating every object individually.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 159
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
160 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 7: Non-Conformal Mesh
7.1. Introduction
This tutorial examines the effects of using a non-conformal mesh rather than a conformal mesh in a
simple pin-fin heat-sink problem.
• Generate a non-conformal mesh and related parameters such as slack values, maximum element sizes,
and so on.
• Understand the effects of a non-conformal mesh on total mesh count and results.
7.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you are familiar with the menu structure in ANSYS Icepak and that you have
explored the Sample Session in the Icepak User’s Guide and the tutorial Finned Heat Sink. For this
reason, some steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.
The objective of this exercise is to become familiar with the non-conformal meshing methodology and
its application. You will examine and compare the solution results of a conformal and a non-conformal
mesh.
In ANSYS Icepak, you can mesh assemblies of objects separately. First, you define a region around an
assembly, then ANSYS Icepak meshes this region independently of meshes external to your defined
region. This allows a fine mesh to be confined in a particular region of interest and helps to reduce
overall mesh count without sacrificing the accuracy of the results.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 161
Non-Conformal Mesh
Enter the following start and end locations for the cabinet.
xS 0.3 m xE 0.7 m
yS 0.5 m yE 0.7 m
zS 0.0 m zE 1.0 m
4. In the Properties tab of the Openings panel, enter 1 m/s for the Z velocity and keep Temperature
as ambient (which is 20°C). Refer to Figure 7.2: Openings Panel for Wall Min z (p. 163).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
162 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Extra:
You can edit the ambient temperature setting, among other default settings, in the
Basic parameters panel.
1. Under the Properties tab of the Cabinet panel, change the wall type of Max z to Grille.
3. In the Properties tab of the Grille panel, change the Free area ratio to 0.8 and leave the other
default property specifications.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 163
Non-Conformal Mesh
• Source ( )
Object Specification
Name: source.1 xS = 0.48 m xE = 0.52 m Total power: 30 W
Geometry: Rectangular yS = 0.52 m yE = —
Plane: X-Z zS = 0.48 m zE = 0.52 m
• Heat sink ( )
Now, create a heat sink with the following geometrical and physical properties (Figure 7.4: Heat sinks
Panel (Specifications for Geometry and Properties) (p. 165)):
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
164 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Generate a Conformal Mesh
Figure 7.4: Heat sinks Panel (Specifications for Geometry and Properties)
1. Open the Mesh control panel using Model → Generate mesh or the Generate Mesh button ( ).
a. In the Mesh control panel, set the Max element size for X to 0.02 m, for Y to 0.01 m, and for Z
to 0.05 m.
d. Click Generate.
Note
The minimum gap for X, Y, Z may adjust to 10% of the minimum dimension in respect-
ive directions. Make a note of the number of elements, shown in the Mesh control
panel, as well as the face alignment range, displayed in the Message window.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 165
Non-Conformal Mesh
Note
The mesh display plane is an X-Z plane cut through the center of the cabinet as shown
in Figure 7.5: Conformal Mesh, Central Y Plane (p. 166). Note the clustered mesh lines ex-
tending from the heat sink all the way across the domain in both the X and Z directions.
The total number of cells is about 144000.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
166 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
Click Reset in the Basic settings panel. Check the values printed to the Message window. The Reynolds
and Peclet numbers are approximately 12600 and 8900, respectively, so the flow is turbulent.
Note
Instead of accessing the Basic parameters panel as described below, you can instead
use the Problem setup wizard for guided problem setup by double-clicking Problem
setup in the model manager window. See 2.7. Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings of
the Finned Heat Sink tutorial for more instruction regarding the Problem setup wizard. You
must still use the same settings described in this tutorial for the Problem setup wizard.
1. To set up turbulent flow, go to Problem setup → Basic parameters and choose the Zero
equation turbulence model under the General setup tab.
2. Forced convection is the predominant form of convection in this exercise. Natural convection is negligible,
so do not enable gravity. Also ignore radiation heat transfer as it is also negligible in comparison to
forced convection. This exercise is a steady-state analysis. Click Accept to accept the new solver settings.
3. Go to Solution settings → Basic settings and set the Number of iterations to 300.
4. Go to Advanced settings and specify Under-relaxation factors for Pressure, Momentum, and Temper-
ature as 0.7, 0.3, and 1.0 respectively.
5. Define a monitor point by dragging the source object (source.1) into the Points folder. This creates
a monitor point for the temperature of the object, which can be used to judge convergence alongside
the residuals.
Extra:
Speed up the convergence by initializing the solver with a Z velocity of 1.0 m/s in the
Transient setup tab of the Basic parameters panel.
1. Define a report that will display temperature data for the source and the heat sink.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 167
Non-Conformal Mesh
ANSYS Icepak opens the Report summary data panel, where minimum, maximum, and mean
temperatures for the heat sink and source are displayed. Note that the maximum temperature is
about 36.7° C.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
168 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Add an Assembly to the Model
Note
Because you are changing the current model, thereby invalidating the post-processing data
that has been loaded from the previous steps, you will need to generate a mesh (a non-
conformal mesh) and calculate the solution again which is shown in steps 9 through 11.
1. Create an assembly consisting of the source and the heat sink objects.
a. Click the Create assemblies button ( ) to create a new assembly. This creates an assembly node
in the Model manager window under the Model node.
b. Select the source.1 item under the Model node in the Model manager window, hold down the Ctrl
key, and then select the heatsink.1 item.
c. Hold down the left mouse button, drag both highlighted items into the assembly.1 node of the tree,
then release the left mouse button.
Note
You can also create assemblies by highlighting source.1 and heatsink.1 in the Model
manager window, then right-clicking one of the highlights, going to Create, then finally
selecting Assembly..
a. Select the assembly.1 node in the Model manager window, and then click the Edit object button
( ) to open the Assemblies panel.
c. Select the Mesh separately option and enter the Slack parameters shown in Figure 7.6: Slack Values
and Mesh Controls in the Separately Mesh Assembly (p. 170).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 169
Non-Conformal Mesh
Figure 7.6: Slack Values and Mesh Controls in the Separately Mesh Assembly
This creates a bounding box region that is 0.05 m larger than the assembly on four sides. Since
Min Y is already at the bottom of the cabinet, no slack value can be provided for it. A larger
slack value of 0.15 m has been provided in the Max Z direction to resolve the wake region. Note
that a smaller Max X and Max Z grid size has been specified within the assembly compared to
the global max grid size. This helps to refine the mesh within the separately meshed assembly.
d. Click Done to set the properties of the assembly and close the panel.
The new model is shown in Figure 7.7: The Source and Heat Sink in a Separately Meshed As-
sembly (p. 171).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
170 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Generate a Non-conformal Mesh
Figure 7.7: The Source and Heat Sink in a Separately Meshed Assembly
a. In the Mesh control panel, keep the Max element size for X set to 0.02 m, for Y set to 0.01 m,
and for Z set to 0.05 m.
b. Under the Global tab, make sure the Mesh assemblies separately option is checked.
Note
Make a note of the number of elements, shown in the Mesh control panel, as well
as the face alignment range, displayed in the Message window.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 171
Non-Conformal Mesh
The mesh display plane is an - plane cut through the center of the cabinet as shown in Fig-
ure 7.8: Non-conformal Mesh (p. 172). Note the clustered mesh lines extending from the heat sink
all the way across the domain in both the and directions only within the bounds of the as-
sembly. The total number of cells is about 107000.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
172 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 11: Calculate a Solution
Note
The monitor point that you already created is automatically used for the new solution.
Your residuals plot may look similar to Figure 7.9: Residuals Plot for the Non-Conformal Mesh (p. 174).
Note that the number of iterations is less than that of the solution using the conformal mesh. The
exact number of iterations required for convergence may vary on different computers.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 173
Non-Conformal Mesh
a. Retain the same temperature report of the source and the heat sink, as used in the version without
the assembly.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
174 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 13: Summary
Note that the reported temperatures (Figure 7.10: Report summary data for the Non-Conformal
Mesh (p. 175)) are very close to that obtained in the solution with the conformal mesh.
We repeat some of the tips and best practices found in this tutorial for your convenience:
1. Best Practices
a. Reduce mesh counts and consequently decrease run times by creating separately meshed assemblies
that require a different mesh density. Also select suitable slack values that improve the convergence
rate while avoiding mesh bleeding.
b. Increase slack values for faces with a wake region if using a separately meshed assembly. Do this to
capture the wake more accurately.
c. Use the Problem setup wizard for guided problem setup. Edit the problem setup if needed using
the Basic parameters panel.
d. Create monitor points of relevant quantities (temperature, pressure, or velocity) to help judge conver-
gence alongside residuals.
a. Copy similar objects then edit the copied objects to the desired specifications to eliminate redundant
work. This is faster than creating every object individually.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 175
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
176 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 8: Mesh and Model Enhancement Exercise
8.1. Objective
The objective of this exercise is to lead you through the decision making process involved in improving
a model. The inferences from the exercise should help you make appropriate modeling choices during
your next thermal modeling project.
8.2. Prerequisites
You should be familiar with:
• Basics of meshing
• Non-conformal meshing
• Non-conformal meshing
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 177
Mesh and Model Enhancement Exercise
Work with this model for as long as you prefer within the allocated 15 minutes then stop and proceed
to the next set of instructions.
Hint
Start by generating the mesh without making any changes. View mesh cut planes at various
orientations and locations to identify causes that result in unnecessary mesh clusters in non-
critical regions. Then modify the model in order to tackle the issues you notice.
• Generate the mesh without modifying the model. You will see a mesh count of about 700,000 elements.
Note
• Create mesh cut planes in different orientations to identify the root cause for such a high mesh count.
One such cut plane (Z plane through center set position) is shown in Figure 8.1: A Mesh Cut Plane View
of the Given Model When Meshed Without Modifications (p. 179).
• Figure 8.1: A Mesh Cut Plane View of the Given Model When Meshed Without Modifications (p. 179) shows
that the high mesh count is due to grid bleeding from the heat sink and the components cooled by it.
Note
You can use non-conformal assemblies to avoid mesh bleeding in ANSYS Icepak.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
178 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Modification 1: Non-Conformal Mesh of the Heat Sink and Components
Figure 8.1: A Mesh Cut Plane View of the Given Model When Meshed Without Modifications
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 179
Mesh and Model Enhancement Exercise
Tip
• Inside the graphics window, hold the Shift key, then click and draw a box around the group
of objects you would like to assemble.
• If you have trouble selecting the heat sink objects, you can make the mesh and some objects
invisible.
• You can also select the objects in the Model manager window by selecting heatsink.1
and then holding down Shift and clicking all objects with HS_component in their name.
a. Select Mesh separately under the Meshing tab of the Assemblies panel for this assembly (HS-asy)
and specify appropriate slack values (we recommend 1 mm on all sides as in Figure 8.2: Slack Values
for HS-asy (p. 181)). Furthermore, it is usually best practice to have 2-3 cells within the slack region.
You can verify the number of cells within a slack region by examining the mesh in that area.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
180 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Modification 1: Non-Conformal Mesh of the Heat Sink and Components
Tip
Use the Case check macro to ensure that no problematic assembly intersections exist.
In the Macros menu, select Case check → Automatic Case Check Tool. Click Apply
for each case and note that there are no errors. Click Close when finished.
c. Observe the decrease in element count. The mesh count should be around 300,000 elements compared
to the previous 700,000 element count.
Figure 8.3: Comparison Between the Non-Conformal Mesh and the Conformal Mesh (p. 182) shows
the difference between the non-conformal mesh and the conformal mesh you have generated.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 181
Mesh and Model Enhancement Exercise
Notice that in the non-conformal mesh, mesh bleeding is minimal. In the conformal mesh, the mesh
bleeds throughout the cabinet, resulting in a much higher overall mesh count.
Figure 8.3: Comparison Between the Non-Conformal Mesh and the Conformal Mesh
• This time the unwanted meshing bleeding originates from the clusters of components named hi-flux-
comp (red colored objects).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
182 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Modification 2: Non-Conformal Mesh for the hi-flux-comps Cluster
Even though you are only interested in isolating the hi-flux-comp objects, there are two cylindrical
objects very close to it. You have two choices.
• Avoid the cylinders by using zero slack value. This may be too small and create a small gap between
the interface and the cylinders, which is not recommended because it can lead to cells with high aspect
ratios.
3. Create a non-conformal assembly named hfc-asy that includes the objects with the names hi-flux-
comp, Tab, Die, or cylinder-comp. See the objects highlighted in Figure 8.5: Objects for Assembly hfc-
asy (p. 184). Note that the Tab and Die objects are physically contained within the hi-flux-comp objects.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 183
Mesh and Model Enhancement Exercise
4. Edit the hfc-asy assembly and specify the slack settings as shown in Figure 8.6: Slack Settings for Assembly
hfc-asy (p. 185):
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
184 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Modification 2: Non-Conformal Mesh for the hi-flux-comps Cluster
6. Compare to the previous mesh and notice you have eliminated mesh bleeding originating from the hi-
flux-comp cluster (Figure 8.7: Mesh Bleeding Reduction due to Modification 2 (p. 186)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 185
Mesh and Model Enhancement Exercise
7. Repeat cut plane viewing. Figure 8.8: Mesh Bleeding from the Boards (p. 186) shows a cut plane view after
creating the two separate mesh regions. You can still eliminate the mesh bleeding emanating from the
boards.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
186 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Modification 4: Separation Tolerance and Minimum Gap Settings
Figure 8.9: Cut Plane View of Recursive Embedded Mesh (p. 187) shows the resultant Y-center cut plane
of the mesh.
This method of creating a super assembly containing sub-non-conformal assemblies is called "nested
non-conformal meshing" or "recursive embedded meshing".
By default, ANSYS Icepak accepts all minimum gap changes. We shall revisit these changes now.
– In the Mesh control panel, set all the Minimum gap settings to 1e-4 m (Figure 8.10: Minimum gap
Settings (p. 188)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 187
Mesh and Model Enhancement Exercise
– The pop-up message as shown in Figure 8.11: Separation Warning (p. 189) will appear.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
188 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Modification 4: Separation Tolerance and Minimum Gap Settings
– This warning appears because the gap (think of it as a tolerance setting for the mesher) distance is
larger than 10% of the smallest feature in the model.
– When there are objects smaller than the mesher tolerance, those objects will not be meshed correctly.
– However, note that the minimum gap setting is a useful tool designed to avoid unnecessary meshing
in regions with inadvertent geometry misalignments (without modifying the geometry) or regions that
do not require physical modeling.
– Look for the name of the object featured in the warning and its dimension.
– The warning is about the die objects, which are 0.0004 m in width.
Note
Due to possibly different meshing priorities, you may get a warning for the object Airgap
first as the object’s thickness is equal to the minimum gap settings. Select Change value
and mesh if that warning appears.
→ These objects are power generating components, which are thin conducting plates. The warning is
about the width of the packages.
→ The surface area of the dies is a critical parameter affecting the temperature prediction for the com-
ponent. This cannot be simplified. Selecting Continue, don’t change would essentially ignore the
small geometry of the dies during meshing.
→ Hence accept the suggested change in the minimum gap setting. The resultant mesh count is signi-
ficantly lower than the mesh count of the original model.
Note
It is also possible to use a separation distance larger than the recommended 10%
value. Values of up to 50% (of the smallest dimension) may be used in cases where
reducing the mesh count is critical.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 189
Mesh and Model Enhancement Exercise
– You will now get a separation warning about the tabs. You cannot change the geometry of the tabs,
so accept the suggested change in separation settings again.
Note
You may get a message in the text window such as "16 values were modified by less than
minimum separation values to eliminate small gaps". The mesher is modifying the geometry
itself to get rid of problematic small gaps due to misalignments. In this exercise, the
modifications are negligible and thus do not cause a problem.
Tip
The size of the first cells from critical heat-dissipating surfaces should be less than 1 mm
for a first cut analysis.
– View the mesh cut plane on the wall of the enclosure object, the PCB, and the critical heat generating
components to see if you are fulfilling the above requirement.
– Use the Object params control in the Local tab of the Mesh control panel to specify mesh refinement
near all the important surfaces mentioned above. The Object params panel allows localized, per-object
mesh control. For an example, enter 0.001 for the Element height of the enclosure object. A similar
approach can be taken for the pcb object.(Figure 8.12: Per-object Meshing Parameters (p. 190)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
190 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Conclusion
Deselect the Mesh assemblies separately option in the Mesh control panels and generate the mesh.
The difference between the mesh with this check button selected and deselected is the effect of non-
conformal meshing.
• Problem setup, solution, and post-processing are beyond the scope of this exercise and are therefore not
explored.
• Compare the suggested approach to meshing with the approach you were attempting during the initial
15 minute period of this tutorial.
8.13. Conclusion
You have significantly reduced the mesh count of a model through successive modifications to the
mesh. Consequently, the computing time and cost of the solution is much lower. Using approximate
object choices and enhanced meshing strategies, you have improved both the model and the mesh.
The approach delineated in this exercise can help reduce significant run time without compromising
the physics being modeled. Use the techniques you have learned in this tutorial to improve your meshes
in other projects.
We repeat some of the tips and best practices found in this tutorial for your convenience:
1. Best Practices
c. Reduce the cell count by eliminating mesh bleeding and choosing appropriate minimum gap values.
e. Use the Case check macro to avoid intersections between different objects and/or assemblies.
f. Choose suitable slack values to avoid mesh bleeding while adequately reducing mesh count.
g. Ensure that the size of the first cells from critical heat-dissipating surfaces is less than 1 mm for a first
cut analysis.
a. Make objects temporarily invisible or inactive when the objects obstruct your view in the graphics
window.
b. Select appropriate minimum gap values to avoid unnecessary meshing in regions with inadvertent
geometry misalignments or in regions where physical modeling is unneeded.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 191
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
192 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 9: Loss Coefficient for a Hexa-Grille
9.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates how to define trials, run parametric solutions, and post-process the results.
Often, there is a need to calculate the loss coefficient of grilles that have certain hole patterns. The
purpose of the problem is to determine the minor loss coefficient of a grille that has hexagonal holes.
• Define trials.
9.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you are familiar with the menu structure in ANSYS Icepak and that you have
solved or read the tutorial Finned Heat Sink. Some steps in the setup and solution procedure will not
be shown explicitly.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 193
Loss Coefficient for a Hexa-Grille
When ANSYS Icepak starts, the Welcome to Icepak panel opens automatically.
4. In the File selection panel, select the packed project file loss-coefficient.tzr and click Open.
The Location for the unpacked project file selection dialog appears.
5. In the Location for the unpacked project file selection dialog, select a directory where you would like
to place the packed project file, enter a project name in the New project text field, then click Unpack.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
194 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
This enables you to expand on the problem without affecting the original file.
2. Click Save.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 195
Loss Coefficient for a Hexa-Grille
1. Define the report that displays average velocity and pressure data at the inlet and outlet openings.
Note
The loss coefficient K is obtained by dividing the total pressure differential through the
domain by the average dynamic pressure, = − − − .
a. In the Define summary report panel, click New.
d. Repeat steps (a) and (b), then select Pressure in the Value drop-down list.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
196 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Define Parameters and Trials
f. Click the Close button to accept the settings and close the panel.
2. Define a velocity parameter at the inlet opening in terms of the Reynolds number ( ).
Note
The velocity at the inlet opening in terms of the Reynolds number (), which is custom-
arily used in loss-coefficient plots in lieu of velocity, is calculated as = ∗ , where
the kinematic viscosity ν = 1.84e-5 kg/m.s, and the hydraulic diameter of the duct Dh =
9.322e-3 m.
a. Select the inlet opening, cabinet_default_side_minx, in the Model manager window, and then click
the Edit object button ( ) to open the Openings panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 197
Loss Coefficient for a Hexa-Grille
d. Click Done to set the properties of the opening. This opens the Param value panel.
e. Set the Initial value of Re to 10, and click Done to close both the Param value and the Openings
panels.
3. Define six trials according to the different values of the Reynolds number.
a. In the Parameters and optimization panel, ensure you have selected Parametric trials and All
combinations in the Setup tab.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
198 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Define Parameters and Trials
b. Click the Design variables tab, enter the following values for the Reynolds number in the box next
to the Discrete values field: 10 50 100 500 1000 1750.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 199
Loss Coefficient for a Hexa-Grille
Note
c. Click the Trials tab to review the trials. Ensure the Trials across top option at the bottom of the tab
is not selected, and click Reset to select Values instead of Numbered in order to use the base names
as values.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
200 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Define Parameters and Trials
4. Set the parametric trials and define primary and compound functions.
a. While you are still in the Parameters and optimization panel, click the Setup tab.
b. Verify that the Parametric trials and All combinations options are selected.
Note
These functions represent static pressures and average velocities at the inlet and
outlet, respectively.
i. Under Primary functions, click the New button to open the Define primary function panel.
ii. In the Define primary function panel, enter Pstat_in for the Function name.
iii. Select Report summary from the Function type drop-down list and cabinet_default_side_minx
Pressure from the Item drop-down list and retain the selection of Max.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 201
Loss Coefficient for a Hexa-Grille
iv. Click Accept to accept the changes and close the panel.
v. Repeat steps (i) through (iv) for the following three functions:
Important
5. Define five compound functions (Pdyn_in, Pdyn_out, Ptot_in, Ptot_out, and Kfact).
a. Under Compound functions, click the New button to open the Define compound function panel.
b. In the Define compound function panel, enter Pdyn_in for the Function name.
e. Repeat steps (a) through (d) for the following four functions:
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
202 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Generate a Mesh
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 203
Loss Coefficient for a Hexa-Grille
Note
The mesh display plane is an X-Z cut plane through the center of the cabinet as shown
in Figure 9.3: Mesh on the X-Z Plane (p. 204).
e. Deselect the Cut plane check box. Select the Volume check box.
g. In the Model manager window, click block.1. View the volume mesh of the hex structure (Fig-
ure 9.4: Volume Mesh of Object block.1 (p. 205)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
204 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Physical and Numerical Settings
3. Deselect the Display mesh option to turn off the mesh display.
Note
Instead of accessing the Basic parameters panel as described below, you can instead
use the Problem setup wizard for guided problem setup by double-clicking Problem
setup in the model manager window. See 2.7. Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings of
the Finned Heat Sink tutorial for more instruction regarding the Problem setup wizard. You
must still use the same settings described in this tutorial for the Problem setup wizard.
1. Confirm that ANSYS Icepak solves for only the flow variables (velocity/pressure) and that the flow regime
is laminar.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 205
Loss Coefficient for a Hexa-Grille
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
206 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Physical and Numerical Settings
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 207
Loss Coefficient for a Hexa-Grille
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
208 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Examine the Results
Note
Alternatively, you can click the button in the Model and solve toolbar to display the
Parameters and optimization panel.
2. Make sure Allow fast trials (single .cas file) is not selected in the Setup tab.
Plot the loss coefficient, Kfact, against the Reynolds number, Re.
1. In the Parametric trials panel, click the Plot button to open the Selection panel.
2. In the Selection panel, select Re as the axis variable, and click Okay.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 209
Loss Coefficient for a Hexa-Grille
3. In another Selection panel, which automatically opens up, select Kfact as the y axis variable, and click
Accept.
This displays the plot Kfact vs Re, as shown in Figure 9.5: Kfact vs Re Plot (p. 210)
We repeat some of the tips and best practices found in this tutorial for your convenience:
• Best Practice
– Use the Problem setup wizard for guided problem setup. Edit the problem setup if needed using the
Basic parameters panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
210 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Summary
– Use the Parameters and optimization feature to perform a parametric analysis of your system.
– Create your own independent variable, such as a varying Reynolds number, in the Design variables
tab of the Parameters and optimization panel.
– Define your own customized quantities for ANSYS Icepak to report in the Functions tab of the Para-
meters and optimization panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 211
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
212 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 10: Inline and Staggered Heat Sinks Comparison
10.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates how to use the check-box (boolean) parameter control for design variables,
and how to assign primary functions, in order to determine whether an inline or a staggered pin fin
heat sink performs better in a single model. You will compare the resulting maximum temperatures on
the package. Non-conformal meshing will also be used to reduce the cell count, required memory, and
run time. In addition, you will generate particle traces during the post-processing of the results.
• Clip a plane cut to align it with the sides of a heat sink assembly.
• Display particle traces coming from the fan and the opening.
10.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you are familiar with the menu structure in ANSYS Icepak and that you have
solved or read the tutorial Finned Heat Sink. Some steps in the setup and solution procedure will not
be shown explicitly.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 213
Inline and Staggered Heat Sinks Comparison
Note
When ANSYS Icepak starts, the Welcome to Icepak panel will open automatically.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
214 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Note
4. In the File selection panel, select the packed project file heat_sink2b.tzr and click Open.
Note
The Location for the unpacked project file selection dialog will appear.
5. In the Location for the unpacked project file selection dialog, select a directory where you would like
to place the packed project file, enter a project name in the New project text field, then click Unpack.
Note
This tutorial uses an existing model. ANSYS Icepak will display the heat sink model in the
graphics window. To view all components, expand all the assemblies of the model in the
Model manager window.
Note
You can rotate the cabinet around a central point using the left mouse button, or you can
translate it to any point on the screen using the middle mouse button. You can zoom into
and out from the cabinet using the right mouse button. To restore the cabinet to its default
orientation, select Home position from the Orient menu.
Note
This will allow you to expand on the problem without affecting the original file.
• Click Save.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 215
Inline and Staggered Heat Sinks Comparison
Note
For both heat sinks, you will define the HeatSink parameter, which will activate/deactivate
heat sinks parametrically.
a. Select the Inline assembly in the Model manager window, and then click the Edit object button
( ) to open the Assemblies panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
216 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Define Design Variables
b. Right-click the Active check box to open the Active parameter panel.
Caution
e. Click Accept in the Active parameter panel to accept the changes and close the panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 217
Inline and Staggered Heat Sinks Comparison
f. Click Update in the Assemblies panel to open the Param value panel.
g. In the Param value panel, enter Staggered for the Initial value of HeatSink, and click Done to
close the panel.
Note
The word Active in the Assemblies panel became green. Also, note that the Inline
assembly in the Model manager window is moved to the Inactive node.
2. Define the HeatSink parameter for the Staggered heat sink. Repeat the above steps for the Staggered
assembly:
d. Click Accept.
Note
Extra
a. In the Parameters and optimization panel, click the Design variables tab.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
218 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Define Parametric Runs and Assign Primary Functions
b. Next to Discrete values, after "Staggered" type in "Inline". Make sure to separate the two
with a space.
2. Review trials.
b. Make sure that the Order for Staggered is 1, and for Inline is 2.
c. Select tr_HeatSink_Staggered as the Restart ID for the tr_HeatSink_Inline trial as shown in the
image below. This allows the second trial to use the first trial’s solution data to converge its own
solution more quickly.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 219
Inline and Staggered Heat Sinks Comparison
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
220 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Define Parametric Runs and Assign Primary Functions
c. In the Define primary function panel, enter Tmax next to Function name.
e. In the Object drop-down list, select the 700_BGA_40X40_5peripheral_p1.50 object in the Package
assembly, and click Accept.
f. In the Define primary function panel, click Accept to save the changes and close the panel.
g. Click Done in the Parameters and optimization panel to close the panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 221
Inline and Staggered Heat Sinks Comparison
2. In the Global tab, ensure that the Mesh assemblies separately option is selected.
3. Keep all other defaults in the Mesh control panel. Your panel settings should resemble those in Fig-
ure 10.2: Mesh control Panel Settings (p. 222).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
222 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 6: Physical and Numerical Settings
Note
Instead of accessing the Basic parameters panel, you can instead use the Problem setup
wizard to define your problem setup by double-clicking Problem setup in the model
manager window. See 2.7. Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings of the Finned Heat Sink
tutorial for more instruction regarding the Problem setup wizard. You must still use the
same settings described in this tutorial for the Problem setup wizard.
b. In the Flow regime box, select Turbulent and the Zero equation turbulence model.
c. In the Natural convection box, ensure the Gravity vector check box is not selected.
d. Your Basic parameters settings should resemble those in Figure 10.3: Basic parameters Panel Set-
tings (p. 224). Click Accept when you are done.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 223
Inline and Staggered Heat Sinks Comparison
c. Click Accept in the Basic settings panel to accept the settings and close the panel.
b. Click Accept in the Advanced solver setup panel to accept the settings and close the panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
224 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Calculate a Solution
In addition to the residual plot, the monitor plot will display temperature at the center of the BGA
package object during the solution process and provide another indication of convergence as the
temperature settles on a fixed value.
Note
You can click the button in the Model and solve toolbar.
2. Click the Setup tab, and make sure that options Parametric trials and All combinations are selected.
Deselect Allow fast trials (single .cas file).
3. Click Run in the Parameters and optimization panel, to start the calculations.
Note
As ANSYS Icepak starts calculating solutions for the model, the Solution residuals window,
displaying convergence history, and the Temperature Point monitors window will open.
Also, the Parametric trials panel will open displaying the function values, as well as
parameters and running times for both trials, as shown in Figure 10.5: The Parametric
trials Panel (p. 226). The Parametric trials can also be opened by selecting Show optim-
ization/param results from the Report menu.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 225
Inline and Staggered Heat Sinks Comparison
2. Display velocity vectors on a plane cut at the exit region of the heat sink.
Extra
You can also open the Plane cut panel by clicking the button.
c. Select a point in the graphics window between the fan and the heat sink assembly.
d. Select the Show vectors option, and click Parameters to open the Plane cut vectors panel.
f. In the Plane cut vectors panel, in the Color levels group box, select This object from the Calculated
drop-down list.
g. Your Plane cut vectors panel should resemble that in Figure 10.6: Plane cut vectors Panel (p. 227).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
226 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 10: Examine the Results
h. Click Done in the Plane cut vectors panel to accept the changes and close the panel.
Note
The graphics window is updated, as shown in Figure 10.7: Velocity Vectors at the Exit
Region of the Heat Sink (p. 228)
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 227
Inline and Staggered Heat Sinks Comparison
Figure 10.7: Velocity Vectors at the Exit Region of the Heat Sink
a. While holding down the Shift key, click and hold down the middle mouse button on an edge of the
plane cut.
b. Drag the plane cut through the model in the graphics display window as shown below:
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
228 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 10: Examine the Results
4. Clip the plane cut to align it with the sides of the heat sink assembly.
a. In the Orient menu, first select Orient positive X, then Scale to fit.
b. In the Plane cut panel (that was already opened), select Enable clipping, then click Max Y in the
orange region under Clip to box.
d. In the Plane cut panel, click Min Z in the orange region under Clip to box.
f. In the Plane cut panel, click Max Z in the orange region under Clip to box.
Note
The graphics window will be updated, as shown in Figure 10.8: Clipped Plane
Cut (p. 230)
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 229
Inline and Staggered Heat Sinks Comparison
b. In the Plane cut panel, deselect Show vectors and Enable clipping and select Show particle traces.
c. Click Parameters next to Show particle traces to open the Plane cut particles panel.
e. In the Display options group box, keep the default selection of Uniform, and enter 50.
f. In the Style group box, ensure the Trail check box is selected. For Width, enter 3.
g. In the Color levels group box, select This object from the Calculated drop-down list. Your settings
should match those in Figure 10.9: Plane cut particles Panel (p. 231).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
230 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 10: Examine the Results
Note
The graphics window will display the particle traces in the forward direction, as shown
in Figure 10.10: Forward Particle Traces (p. 232)
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 231
Inline and Staggered Heat Sinks Comparison
f. Select the Show particle traces option, and click Parameters to open the Plane cut particles panel.
h. In the display options group box, keep the default selection of Uniform, and enter 70.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
232 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 11: Summary
i. In the Style group box, keep the default selection of Trail. Type 3 for Width.
j. In the Color levels group box, select This object from the Calculated drop-down list.
k. Click Done in the Plane cut particles and Plane cut panels to close the panels and update the
graphics window.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 233
Inline and Staggered Heat Sinks Comparison
We repeat some of the tips and best practices found in this tutorial for your convenience:
1. Best Practice
a. Use the Problem setup wizard for guided problem setup. Edit the problem setup if needed using
the Basic parameters panel.
b. Create monitor points of relevant quantities (temperature, pressure, or velocity) to help judge conver-
gence alongside residuals.
a. Select a preceding trial's name as the Restart ID for another trial to speed up the convergence.
b. Drag a plane cut through the model by pressing Shift while clicking the middle mouse button on
the edge of the plane cut.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
234 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 11: Minimizing Thermal Resistance
11.1. Introduction
Heat sink optimization is crucial in a variety of industrial applications. Usually, the challenge is to min-
imize the thermal resistance (or to maximize the heat transfer) and the amount of material used for the
heat sink. The objective of this tutorial is to minimize the thermal resistance for the big heat sink, while
keeping the maximum temperature in the entire system below 70°C and ensuring that the total mass
of the heat sinks does not exceed 0.326 kg.
• Set up an optimization problem and publish variables to Workbench for use in ANSYS DesignXplorer.
11.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have little experience with ANSYS Workbench but familiar with the menu
structure in Icepak and that you have solved or read the tutorial Finned Heat Sink.
There is a CPU (block.1) dissipating 50W and a heat sink (heatsink_small) is placed on the top of it.
Between the heat sink and the CPU, there is a thermal interface material (TIM_1) with a thermal con-
ductivity of W/mK. These components and three small power caps (power_cap_1.1, power_cap_1.1.1
and power_cap_1.1.2), dissipating 1 W each, form a non-conformal assembly (hs_assembly_1).
On the other side of the board, there are printed circuit boards racks, dissipating 20 W each, and a
parallel plate heat sink (heatsink_big) is placed on the top of the chips. Similar to the case of the small
heat sink, there is a thermal interface material (TIM_2.1 and TIM_2.1.1) between the large heat sink
and the chips with the same thermal conductivity. These components together form a non-conformal
assembly (hs_assembly_2).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 235
Minimizing Thermal Resistance
2. Start ANSYS Icepak, as described in Starting ANSYS Icepak in the Icepak User’s Guide.
When ANSYS Icepak starts, the Welcome to Icepak panel opens automatically.
4. In the File selection panel, select the packed project file optimization.tzr and click Open.
The Location for the unpacked project file selection dialog appears.
5. In the Location for the unpacked project file selection dialog, select a directory where you would like
to place the packed project file, enter a project name in the New project text field, then click Unpack.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
236 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Define Design Variables
Note
You can rotate the cabinet around a central point using the left mouse button, or you can
translate it to any point on the screen using the middle mouse button. You can zoom into
and out from the cabinet using the right mouse button. To restore the cabinet to its default
orientation, select Home position from the Orient menu.
Save the problem to a new project file (this enables you to expand on the problem without affecting
the original file).
2. Click Save.
1. Define the finCount and finThick design variables for the heatsink_big and specify their initial
values.
b. Select the heatsink_big in the Model manager window and click the Edit object button ( ) to
open the Heat sinks panel.
d. Under the Fin setup tab, type $finCount next to Count, and press Enter on the keyboard to
open the Param value panel.
Important
e. In the Param value panel, enter 15 for the Initial value of finCount, and click Done to close the
panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 237
Minimizing Thermal Resistance
f. In the Heat sinks panel, under the Fin setup tab, type $finThick next to Thickness, and press
Enter on the keyboard to open the Param value panel.
g. In the Param value panel, enter 0.762 for the Initial value of finThick, and click Done to close the
panel.
Extra
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
238 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Define Design Variables
a. Turn on the Optimization option in the Setup tab. Then click on the Design variables tab.
The design variables that you had defined will be listed in the panel, and their initial values will
be shown in the Base value text box.
b. Select finCount from the list, then enter 2 for the Min value constraint, 18 for the Max value
constraint.
c. Select Allow only multiples, keep the default value of 1, and click Apply.
d. Select finThick from the list, then enter 0.254 for the Min value constraint, 2.032 for the Max
value constraint, and click Apply.
e. Make sure Allow only multiples is only activated for finCount, not finThick.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 239
Minimizing Thermal Resistance
1. Make sure that the Mesh type is Mesher-HD and the Mesh assemblies separately option is turned on.
2. Make sure the Allow minimum gap changes is enabled in the Misc tab.
2. Click Accept in the Basic parameters panel to accept the settings and close the panel.
2. Make sure the convergence criteria for Flow is 0.001, and for Energy is 1e-7.
Note
The objective of this tutorial is to minimize the thermal resistance of the heat sink while
keeping the maximum temperature for the entire system below 70°C and ensuring that the
total mass of the heat sinks does not exceed 0.326 kg. Therefore, you will define the following
primary functions: thermal resistance for the large heat sink (bighsrth), mass of the large
heat sink (bighsms), mass of the small heat sink (smlhsms), and global maximum temper-
ature of 70°C (mxtmp). You will also define a compound function, the total mass of the heat
sinks of 0.326 kg (totalmass). For the objective function, you will minimize the thermal
resistance of the large heat sink (bighsrth).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
240 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Define Primary, Compound, and Objective Functions
a. Define the thermal resistance function for the large heat sink (bighsrth).
ii. In the Define primary function panel, enter bighsrth next to Function name.
iii. In the Function type drop-down list, keep the default selection of Global value.
v. In the Object drop-down list, select the heatsink_big object under hs_assembly_2, and click
Accept to save the changes and close the panel.
b. Define the mass function for the large heat sink (bighsms).
i. Repeat step (a) for the bighsms as the Function name, Global value as the Function type,
Mass of objects as the Value, and heatsink_big as the Object.
c. Define the mass function for the small heat sink (smlhsms).
i. Repeat step (a) for the smlhsms as the Function name, Global value as the Function type,
Mass of objects as the Value, and heatsink_small as the Object.
ii. In the Define primary function panel, enter mxtmp next to Function name.
iii. In the Function type drop-down list, keep the default selection of Global value.
iv. In the Value drop-down list, keep the default selection of Global maximum temperature.
vi. Enter 70 in the text entry field and click Accept to save the changes and close the panel.
a. Under Compound functions, click the New button to open the Define compound function panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 241
Minimizing Thermal Resistance
b. In the Define compound function panel, enter totalmass for the Function name.
e. Enter 0.326 in the text entry field and click Accept to save the changes and close the panel.
a. In the Parameters and optimization panel, select bighsrth from the Objective function drop-down
list.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
242 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Calculate a Solution
Note
Alternatively, you can click the button in the Model and solve toolbar.
b. Verify that the Optimization option is turned on, and keep all the defaults for this option.
Note
Due to the geometry change based on the fin thickness and fin count, the fast trials
option is not possible in this problem.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 243
Minimizing Thermal Resistance
3. Click Run in the Parameters and optimization panel to start the calculations.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
244 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 10: Optimization in DesignXplorer
Note
Note
When ANSYS Workbench starts, the Toolbox and Project Schematic are displayed.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 245
Minimizing Thermal Resistance
• Add an Icepak template by dragging the template from the Toolbar under the Component Systems node
into the Project Schematic. Perform a right mouse click on the Setup cell. select Import Icepak Project
and Browse to import the optimization-new project and launch Icepak.
• The model appears in the graphics display window. Click the isometric toolbar icon ( ) to display the
isometric view of the model.
• Go to Solve → Run optimization to open the Parameters and optimization panel. Click on Publish
to WB to display the Publish variables panel and select the green check marks to select all input and
output variables. Output variables for Workbench are primary and compound functions in Icepak. Click
Accept to save your specifications and click Done to close the panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
246 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 10: Optimization in DesignXplorer
• In Workbench, the Parameter Set is displayed. Double click the Parameter Set bar to display an outline
of all parameters and the table of design points.
• From the Toolbox under the Design Exploration node, add a Response Surface Optimization template
by dragging the template into the Project Schematic.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 247
Minimizing Thermal Resistance
Perform a right mouse click on the Design of Experiments cell and select Preview to see a preview
of design points. Again, perform a right mouse click on the Design of Experiments cell and select
Update to run an optimization. The optimization data will provide information of the variable affected
the most by the different combinations.
Next double click on the Optimization cell to open it. Enter the objectives and constraints as shown
in the figure below. Click Update to run an optimization.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
248 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 12: Additional Exercise
To see the Candidate Points selected, click on Candidate Points in the Outline of Schematic. The
optimal fin count and thickness are determined.
If we compare the results from DesignXplorer to ANSYS Icepak, you will find similar results. In addition
further parametric and direct optimization methods can be tried.
• Design variables
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 249
Minimizing Thermal Resistance
• Primary functions
• Compound function
• Objective function
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
250 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 12: Radiation Modeling
12.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates how to model radiation in ANSYS Icepak. In this tutorial, you will learn how
to include the effects of radiation in a free convection environment with surface-to-surface (S2S), discrete
ordinates (DO) and ray-tracing radiation models.
12.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have worked on Sample Session and the tutorials Finned Heat Sink and
RF Amplifier in this guide.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 251
Radiation Modeling
Figure 12.1: Dimensions of the Cabinet and the Boundary Condition Specifications
2. In the Properties tab of the Cabinet panel, define all the sides of the cabinet as shown above. The Min
y and Max y sides are defined as openings while all the remaining sides are stationary walls.
4. The printed circuit board (PCB), heat sink base and the fins of the heat sink will be constructed using
the block object in ANSYS Icepak.
a. First, create a block and rename it as PCB in the Info tab of the Blocks panel.
b. Specify the dimensions of the block in the Geometry tab as shown below in Figure 12.2: Dimensions
of the PCB (p. 253).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
252 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
a. Right-click the Model node and select Create object and then Material. A new node called Materials
will appear.
b. Expand the Materials node until you reach material.1. Double-click material.1 to open the Materials
panel.
c. In the Properties tab of the Materials panel, choose Orthotropic from the Conductivity type drop-
down list.
i. Enter 40, 40, and 0.4 W/m-K for the X, Y, and Z directions, respectively.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 253
Radiation Modeling
e. In the Model manager window, double-click the PCB object we created to open the Blocks panel
again.
f. In the Properties tab of the Blocks panel, select material.1 from the Solid material drop-down list
as shown in Figure 12.3: Specifying material.1 as PCB Solid Material (p. 254).
a. Create a new block and rename it as hs-base in the Info tab of the Blocks panel.
b. Specify the dimensions of the block in the Geometry tab as shown below in Figure 12.4: Dimensions
of the hs-base (p. 255).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
254 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
a. Create a new block and rename it as hs-fin.1.1 in the Info tab of the Blocks panel.
b. Specify the dimensions of the block in the Geometry tab as shown below in Figure 12.5: Heat Sink
Fin Dimensions (p. 256).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 255
Radiation Modeling
c. Leave all the other properties as their default values. Click Done to close the Blocks panel.
i. Right-click the hs-fin1.1 object in the Model manager window and select Copy. The Copy block
hs-fin.1.1 panel opens.
iii. Check the Translate option and set the X, Y and Z offset to 15, 0, and 0 mm respectively.
iv. Click Apply to close the Copy block hs-fin.1.1 panel and create the new fins.
9. Create a 75 W, 2D source.
a. Create a source using the Create sources button in the model toolbar.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
256 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
b. In the Sources panel, specify the geometry and properties of the source according to Fig-
ure 12.6: Source at the Bottom on the Heat Sink (p. 257).
Note
Tip
Alternatively, you can use the snapping tools from the geometry window to align the
source’s dimensions to those of the Min z side of the hs-base block object. The
snapping tools here are labeled by their respective faces, such as xS, xE, yS, yE, and
so on.
c. Click Done to close the Sources panel and complete the creation of the model.
The final model should appear as shown in Figure 12.7: Schematic of the Model (p. 258).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 257
Radiation Modeling
1. Select the source (source.1), the base of the heat sink (hs-base), and all the fins (hs-fin1.1.x) in the
Model manager window together, then right-click and select Create and then Assembly.
2. Double-click assembly.1 in the Model manager window to open the Assemblies panel.
a. In the Meshing tab, click the Mesh separately button, and specify the slack values as well as the
max element sizes in each of the coordinate directions for the assembly as depicted in Figure 12.8: Mesh-
ing Parameters for assembly.1 (p. 259).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
258 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Generate a Mesh
b. This refines the mesh inside the assembly and also prevents mesh bleeding by confining the fine
mesh to within the assembly.
Note
The units depicted in Figure 12.8: Meshing Parameters for assembly.1 (p. 259) are in
mm and m.
3. Once the assembly creation is complete, open the Mesh control panel by pressing the Generate mesh
button.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 259
Radiation Modeling
Note
b. Input the Max element size specifications according to Figure 12.9: Global Mesh Control Paramet-
ers (p. 260).
d. Make sure Allow minimum gap changes is checked under the Misc tab.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
260 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Solving the Model Without Radiation
f. You can view the mesh using the Cut plane and Surface options available in the Display tab.
g. Once you have finished viewing the mesh, make sure you deselect Display mesh in the Display tab,
and click Close to close the Mesh control panel.
Note
Instead of accessing the Basic parameters panel, you can instead use the Problem setup
wizard to define your problem setup by double-clicking Problem setup in the model
manager window. See 2.7. Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings of the Finned Heat Sink
tutorial for more instruction regarding the Problem setup wizard. You must still use the
same settings described in this tutorial for the Problem setup wizard.
a. Under the General setup tab (Figure 12.10: Basic parameters Panel (p. 262)):
i. Ensure that you have selected both Flow (velocity/pressure) and Temperature in the Variables
solved box.
ii. Because this is a natural convection problem select the Gravity vector check box.
iii. Choose Turbulent under the Flow regime group box and select the default turbulence model
Zero equation.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 261
Radiation Modeling
i. In the Ambient conditions group box, set the Temperature and the Radiation temp to 40 C.
Note
Temperature is the temperature of the ambient fluid, and Radiation temp is the
temperature of the surrounding enclosure surfaces used for radiation calculations.
i. Enter a small velocity value for the Y velocity such as 0.01 m/s.
Note
In free convection flow problems, you should set a small initial velocity opposite
to the gravity vector’s direction.
ii. Retain the defaults for all other settings in the Basic parameters panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
262 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Solving the Model Without Radiation
a. Change your settings to match the values in Figure 12.11: Basic settings Panel (p. 263).
a. In the Advanced solver setup panel ensure that the Under-relaxation parameters for Pressure and
Momentum are 0.7 and 0.3, respectively.
b. Select Double from the precision drop-down list at the bottom of the panel (Figure 12.12: Advanced
solver setup Panel (p. 264)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 263
Radiation Modeling
c. Keep all other default options in the Advanced solver setup panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
264 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Surface to Surface (S2S) Radiation Model
c. Once the solution residuals have converged you can post process the results using plane cuts and
object faces. Note the maximum value of temperature for comparison with successive runs wherein
radiative heat transfer will be enabled in the model.
Note
You can check the maximum temperatures of each object by going to Report →
Solution overview → Create or by using the object summary report (Report →
Summary report).
Figure 12.13: Temperature Results for the Model With Radiation Disabled
2. To model radiation effects go to Model → Radiation form factors or use the radiation icon ( ) to
open up the Form factors panel.
a. Under Participating objects, select all objects by clicking All and leave all other settings to their
default values.
i. You can display the view factors calculated in the text window by clicking each participating object
listed under Display object values. Select the object PCB displays the various form factors of
PCB in the graphics window (Figure 12.14: Form Factors of the PCB (p. 266)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 265
Radiation Modeling
ii. After reviewing the view factors, select Don’t recompute in the Form factor options group box.
iii. The settings for the view factor calculations setup are shown in Figure 12.15: Enabling Radiation
in ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 267).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
266 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Discrete Ordinates (DO) Radiation Model
3. Go to Solve → Run solution and start the solver with S2S as the solution ID.
4. Once the solution residuals have converged, make note of the maximum temperature (Figure 12.16: Tem-
perature Results for the Surface to Surface Radiation Model (p. 267)).
Figure 12.16: Temperature Results for the Surface to Surface Radiation Model
a. Enable the Discrete ordinates radiation model option in the Radiation group box.
3. Once the solution residuals have converged, make note of the maximum temperature (Figure 12.17: Tem-
perature Results for the Discrete Ordinates Radiation Model (p. 268)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 267
Radiation Modeling
Figure 12.17: Temperature Results for the Discrete Ordinates Radiation Model
a. Enable the Ray tracing radiation model option in the Radiation group box.
3. Once the solution residuals have converged, make note of the maximum temperature.(Fig-
ure 12.18: Temperature Results for the Ray-Tracing Radiation Model (p. 268))
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
268 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 11: Examine the Results
diation model (c) discrete ordinates radiation model and (d) ray-tracing radiation model (p. 270) compares
the temperature fields for all the four cases.
Note
In order to have the plane cuts located exactly at Z = 20 mm, go to the Plane location group
box of the Plane cut panel. Type 0.02 for the field PZ to set the plane at Z = 0.02 m, or 20
mm..
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 269
Radiation Modeling
Figure 12.19: Plane cuts on the Z = 20 mm plane for (a) radiation disabled (b) S2S radiation model
(c) discrete ordinates radiation model and (d) ray-tracing radiation model
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
270 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 12: Summary
No radiation 82.45°C
Surface to surface 74.97°C
Discrete ordinates 76.23°C
Ray tracing 75.55°C
Because the first case assumes no heat is rejected through radiation, there is less heat transfer and
therefore a higher maximum temperature when neglecting radiation. The radiation models all produce
similar results.
Note
The actual values may differ slightly on different machines, so your values may not look exactly
the same.
In general, the surface to surface model is the fastest of the three radiation models in ANSYS Icepak.
Therefore, you should use it for a first cut analysis. However, you cannot use the surface to surface
model when CAD objects are present. Note that the discrete ordinates and ray tracing models are more
accurate and better suited for more complex geometries. With a large number of participating surfaces,
the surface to surface model and ray tracing model cost significantly more computationally than the
discrete ordinates model.
We repeat some of the tips and best practices found in this tutorial for your convenience:
1. Best Practice
a. Use the Problem setup wizard for guided problem setup. Edit the problem setup if needed using
the Basic parameters panel.
b. Select the Allow minimum gap changes option in the Misc tab of the Mesh control panel to allow
ANSYS Icepak to avoid unnecessary meshing due to inadvertent misalignments in the model. This is
suitable for this tutorial but may not be in other projects.
c. Set a small initial velocity in an opposite direction to the gravity vector's direction when solving
natural convection problems.
d. Use the surface to surface radiation model for a first cut analysis, but switch to the discrete ordinates
or ray tracing radiation models for higher accuracy.
e. Use the discrete ordinates or ray tracing methods when using CAD objects or when you require a
higher fidelity solution than what the surface to surface model can provide.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 271
Radiation Modeling
a. Select the Don't recompute option in the Form factors panel to re-use form factors and save com-
putational time.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
272 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 13: Transient Simulation
13.1. Introduction
The purpose of this exercise is to demonstrate how to model and post-process transient problems.
• Examine the results of a transient simulation, including animating results over time
13.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have worked on Sample Session and the first two ANSYS Icepak tutorials
of this guide (Finned Heat Sink and RF Amplifier).
2. From Problem setup → Basic parameters, go to the Transient setup tab, select Transient under
the Time variation group box. Then enter the Start and End times as 0 and 20 seconds, respectively.
3. Click Edit parameters and set the Time step increment to 1 s and the Solution save interval to 1. Click
Accept in the Transient parameters panel and then the Basic parameters panel to save the new time
parameters.
Caution
The maximum allowable time step varies for each problem. Choosing an excessively large
time step may result in an insufficient temporal resolution and consequently instability
and divergence of the solution. However, choosing an excessively small time step may
result in slow convergence without a significant increase in accuracy.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 273
Transient Simulation
• Cabinet ( )
xS 0.05 m xE 0.35 m
yS 0.1 m yE 0.55 m
zS 0.05 m zE 0.25 m
Open the Cabinet object panel, go to the Properties tab, under Wall type, change Min y and Max
y to Opening. Press Done and then Shift+I for an isometric view.
• Plate ( )
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
274 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Object Properties
Name: plate.1 xS = 0.1 m xE = 0.3 m Thermal model: Con-
ducting thick
Geometry: Rectangular yS = 0.2 m yE = 0.4 m Thickness: 10 mm
Plane: X-Y zS = 0.12 m — Solid material: default
(Al-Extruded)
• Blocks ( )
Make two copies of the tapered fin (block.1), offset by 0.05 m in the X direction (Number of copies
= 2 and Translate with X offset = 0.05 m). Select all three tapered fins, and make two copies of
this group with an offset of 0.05 m in the Y direction (Number of copies = 2, and Translate with
Y offset = 0.05 m). Remember to right-click the icon in the Model manager window to copy objects
or alternatively press Ctrl + c while the objects are selected. These tapered cones model a heat sink
with tapered cone fins.
• Sources ( )
Create source.1, the first of four sources you will create, according to the specifications in the following
table:
Object Specification
Name: source.1 xS = 0.12 xE = 0.18 Total power = 100
m m W
Geometry: Rectangu- yS = 0.22 yE = 0.28
lar m m
Plane: X-Y zS = 0.12
m
The 4 sources have a peak power of 100 watts each and a period of 20 seconds. The variation of
power is according to the following exponential curve, = × , where and are constant and
is the time.
In the Properties tab of the Sources panel, select Transient, click Edit, and enter 0 for Start time
and 20 for End time. To specify the variation curve, click Exponential and set a = 0.025 and b =
100. Click Update and Done, in the Transient power panel and then in the Sources panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 275
Transient Simulation
Now make one copy of source.1 with an offset of 0.1 m in the X direction. Select source.1 and
source.1.1, then make one copy of these two sources with an offset of 0.1 m in the Y-direction to
complete the construction of the sources.
To view the time-dependent power specified for the sources, go to Problem setup → Basic
parameters. Select the Transient setup tab and click View (next to Edit parameters) near the top
of this panel. This displays the time variation of the power specified using sources.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
276 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Figure 13.3: Viewing the Variation of Power on the Sources with Time
Tip
A time dependent power profile such as a piecewise linear curve can also be imported/ex-
ported by clicking Save All and Load All in the Transients panel. Clicking Load All will
open the Load all curves file selection dialog box and override any existing data. Select
the CSV file containing the curve data and click Open.
The final model should appear as that shown in Figure 13.4: Schematic of the Model (p. 278).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 277
Transient Simulation
Note
The Init element height is the first element’s height measured from the surface of the
solid into the fluid. This can be used in a relatively simple model as this one to increase
the boundary layer resolution. It is not recommended to be used for complex models
as this can create very large mesh counts.
Note
Instead of accessing the Basic parameters panel, you can instead use the Problem setup
wizard to define your problem setup by double-clicking Problem setup in the model
manager window. See 2.7. Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings of the Finned Heat Sink
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
278 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Calculate a Solution
tutorial for more instruction regarding the Problem setup wizard. You must still use the
same settings described in this tutorial for the Problem setup wizard.
Go to Problem setup → Basic parameters. In the General setup tab, ensure Laminar is set for
Flow regime, and select the default Gravity vector (X = 0, Y = -9.80665 m/s2, Z = 0). In the Transient
setup tab, give a small initial (global) velocity of 0.001 m/s in the Y direction to increase the conver-
gence rate. Click Accept to accept the changes made and to exit this window.
Go to Solution settings → Basic settings and click Reset to examine the estimated Rayleigh
number. Set Iterations / timestep to 100. This number of iterations per timestep should be sufficient
for the solution to converge at each timestep. Press Accept to close the panel.
Go to Solution settings → Advanced settings and set the Under-relaxation factors to 0.7
for Pressure and 0.3 for Momentum. Press Accept to close the panel.
Create a monitor point to observe the temperature of source.1 with respect to time by dragging and
dropping source.1 into the Points folder in the Model manager window.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 279
Transient Simulation
Figure 13.6: Convergence Plot (p. 280) shows the solution residuals for this exercise. Note that exact re-
siduals and number of iterations may vary on different computers. Each dip corresponds to the conver-
gence of an individual timestep, resulting in a total of 20 timesteps as you had initially specified.
4. Select New, hold down the Shift key and select all blocks in the Objects drop down list. Click Accept.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
280 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Examine the Results
5. Click Write to display the Report summary data panel shown in Figure 13.7: Define summary report
Panel (p. 281).
• Note that the average temperature of the block objects starts at 20°C and increases to about 27°C by
the end of the 20 second duration.
For still images, you can choose to display at a given time or a given time-step. To do so, after creating
post objects in the same manner as in a steady-state run, you can go to Post → Transient settings
or click the transient settings icon ( ) to open the Post-processing time panel. To display at a given
time-step, you can select Time step and click Forward or Backward to step through the time steps.
To display at a given time, you can select Time value, input the time to begin the display and the time
Increment, and select Forward or Backward.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 281
Transient Simulation
To view these images in this model, create the following post-processing objects:
Figure 13.8: Transient Temperature Contour and Velocity Distribution Results at Various Time Values (p. 283)
shows the resulting static images at various time values. Note that at time = 0 the solver uses the
solution initialization you had previously specified as the resulting velocity distribution. As time pro-
gresses, heat dissipated by the sources spreads throughout the heat sink. Consequently, the overall
magnitude of the velocities increases due to the stronger natural convection at higher temperatures.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
282 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Examine the Results
Figure 13.8: Transient Temperature Contour and Velocity Distribution Results at Various Time
Values
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 283
Transient Simulation
To animate the above post objects, go to Post → Transient settings to open the Post-processing
time panel. Click Animate to open the Transient animation window. To animate the current display
on screen, click Animate in the Transient animation panel. The animation can be played once, from
the start time to end time, or in the Loop mode.
Tip
In addition to animating the display in screen, you can also write the animation to a file in
MPEG, GIF, or other neutral formats to be played back later using a third-party software. To
do that, go to Post → Transient settings, then click Animate to open the Transient anim-
ation panel. Select Write to file, then click Write to open the Save animation panel. Pick
a file format, give it a file name, and then click Save. This sequence saves the entire display
area with no scaling.
Alternatively, you can click the Options tab in the Save animation panel and modify the
Scale factor in the Save animation options panel. Also available in Save animation options
panel is Print region. Choose the default Full screen or Mouse selection. Choosing Mouse
selection allows one to draw a rubber band and select only a part of the screen. To do so,
choose Mouse selection, specify the file type and file name, then click Save in the Save
animation panel. With the cursor showing a square and the red prompt at the bottom of
the screen, draw a rectangular region with the left mouse to save it to the animation file.
You can examine how a variable changes over time at selected points using the History plot panel. To
open this panel, select History plot in the Post menu or click ( ) in the post-processing toolbar.
In the History plot panel, enter 20 seconds for End time, click the Add point button and select
source.1 for the point. Click the Create button to display the plot shown in Figure 13.9: History
plot (p. 285).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
284 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 10: Examine Transient Results in CFD-Post
To launch CFD-Post for a Windows system, click Start>All Programs>ANSYS 15.0>Fluid Dynamics>CFD-
Post 15.0 or for a Linux system you can access CFD-Post using ~ansys_inc/v150/CFD-
Post/bin/cfdpost.
In ANSYS CFD-Post, select Load Results... in the File menu to display the Load Results File dialog box.
Select the filename.cfd.cas file that corresponds to the transient solution.
Tip
Refer to the ANSYS Icepak text window for the location and file name of the transient solution
you have just saved.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 285
Transient Simulation
Once the results have been loaded into CFD-Post, there are several options to view and analyze a
transient solution.
a. Go to Insert → Text
c. In the Definition tab of the Details view, enter Time into the Text String field.
f. Click Apply.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
286 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 10: Examine Transient Results in CFD-Post
2. Create a contour.
b. Update the settings for the Geometry tab of the Details view for TemperatureContours as
shown in Figure 13.12: Details of TemperatureContours (p. 288). Note that to select all of the blocks
as shown in the figure, you must click the ... button next to Locations, then you must press Shift
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 287
Transient Simulation
while selecting all of the block nodes in the panel that appears. Click Apply to create the contours
(Figure 13.13: TemperatureContours Display (p. 289)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
288 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 10: Examine Transient Results in CFD-Post
a. Click the timestep selector icon ( ) to display the Timestep Selector panel. Double-click a timestep
to view the corresponding temperatures. Figure 13.14: Timestep Selector Panel (p. 290) shows the se-
lection of time 12.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 289
Transient Simulation
Additional options available in CFD-Post can be found in Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post.
We repeat some of the tips and best practices found in this tutorial for your convenience:
1. Best Practices
a. Use the Problem setup wizard for guided problem setup. Edit the problem setup if needed using
the Basic parameters panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
290 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 10: Summary
b. Choose an appropriate time step to optimize the convergence rate while maintaining solution stability.
c. Select an appropriate amount of iterations per time step for adequate temporal convergence. Note
that an individual time step may require fewer iterations to converge than you specify.
d. Create monitor points of relevant quantities (temperature, pressure, or velocity) to help judge conver-
gence alongside residuals.
a. Copy similar objects then edit the copied objects to the desired specifications to eliminate redundan-
cies. This may be faster than creating every object individually.
b. Set a small initial velocity in an opposite direction to the gravity vector's direction when solving
natural convection problems.
c. Post-process your transient simulation results at specific times in static images or through the entire
transient duration in animations.
d. Save your animations to a file in MPEG, GIF, or other neutral formats to be played back later using a
third-party software.
e. Load your results into ANSYS CFD-Post for even more post-processing capabilities.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 291
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
292 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 14: Zoom-In Modeling in ANSYS Workbench
14.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates how to create and modify a zoom-in model (system sub-model) in ANSYS
Icepak. You will begin in ANSYS Workbench and drag an Icepak template into the Project Schematic
window. You will import an Icepak TZR file, modify the model, and solve it according to the instructions
in this tutorial. The project will also include post-processing results in ANSYS CFD-Post.
• Merge the detailed system level model back into the system level model
14.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have little experience with ANSYS Icepak and ANSYS Workbench, but
that you are generally familiar with the interface. If you are not, review Finned Heat Sink and the ANSYS
Icepak - ANSYS Workbench Integration Tutorial in this guide.
In this tutorial, you will run a simplified system level model of a slotted chassis, learn how to create an
ANSYS Icepak zoom-in model, run that model and then merge the detailed section back into the original
system.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 293
Zoom-In Modeling in ANSYS Workbench
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
294 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
3. Drag and drop an Icepak template under Component Systems in the Toolbox window into the Project
Schematic window.
4. Right-click the Icepak Setup cell (A2) and select Import Icepak Project From .tzr.
5. Select Browse... and the File selection panel appears. Select the packed project file rack.tzr and
click Open.
6. The CAD model appears in the graphics window of ANSYS Icepak. Click the isometric toolbar icon ( )
to display the isometric view of the model.
Note
Look at the specifications of the different components. The model has 10 pairs of plates
(Figure 14.1: Problem Specification (p. 294)). If you examine any pair of plates, plate.1.x rep-
resents the PCB and plate.2.x represents the components on that PCB. In actuality, each
PCB would have many components mounted on it. We are simplifying the model by repres-
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 295
Zoom-In Modeling in ANSYS Workbench
enting the components with a single plate. The thickness of these plates equals the average
height of the components. All the PCBs have the same configuration and the same compon-
ents. The total power of the components in each PCB is 30 W, so each of the plates (plate.2.x)
dissipates 30 W.
Save the problem to a new project file while you are in ANSYS Workbench. This will allow you to expand
on the problem without affecting the original file.
2. Click Save.
Note
ANSYS Workbench will close Icepak to save the model, you will need to launch Icepak again
to continue.
1. Go to Model → Generate Mesh or use the toolbar shortcut ( ) to open the Mesh control panel.
2. In the Mesh control panel, make sure Mesher-HD is selected as the Mesh type.
3. Set the Max element size for X, Y, and Z to 0.03 m if not already set.
5. In the Local tab, select Edit next to Object params (Figure 14.3: Object Parameters in the Mesh control
Panel (p. 297)). Specify the individual localized mesh settings for the following objects using the values
in the table:
Tip
You can specify the parameters of multiple objects simultaneously by selecting all the
desired objects in the node tree of the Per-object meshing parameters panel then
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
296 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Generate a Mesh
making the required parameter specifications. Note that this can only be done to objects
of similar type and orientation.
Note
You can also set mesh parameters by right-clicking object in the Model manager window
and selecting Edit mesh parameters.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 297
Zoom-In Modeling in ANSYS Workbench
7. In the Settings tab of the Mesh control panel, Generate the mesh and then display and visually inspect
the mesh from the Display tab. Deselect the Display mesh option when you are done.
8. Examine the mesh quality by going to the Quality tab of the Mesh control panel. Click Close when you
are done.
2. Go to Problem setup → Basic parameters and make sure the Flow regime is Turbulent and
the turbulence model is Zero equation under the General setup tab. Also select Off in the Radiation
group box. Click Accept to close the panel.
Note
Instead of accessing the Basic parameters panel, you can instead use the Problem
setup wizard to define your problem setup by double-clicking Problem setup in the
model manager window. See 2.7. Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings of the Finned
Heat Sink tutorial for more instruction regarding the Problem setup wizard. You must
still use the same settings described in this tutorial for the Problem setup wizard.
3. Now add two temperature point monitors for plate2.1 and plate2.2 into the Points folder to observe
the progress of the solution at the center of the objects. To do this, highlight both objects in the Model
manager window using the Ctrl key and the left mouse button, and then drag the objects into the
Points folder. The default monitored parameter is temperature.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
298 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
Tip
When the gravity vector is not enabled in the solver, you have the opportunity to reduce
solve time if desired by selecting Sequential solution of flow and energy equations.
Since there are no buoyancy effects, there is no longer coupling of the Navier-Stokes and
energy equations. Thus, you can completely converge the flow equations and then use
that value in the energy equation instead of solving both on every iteration.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 299
Zoom-In Modeling in ANSYS Workbench
Click Animate in the Object face particles panel to see the fluid streamlines animated according
to the steady-state velocity distribution.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
300 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
The post-processing objects face.1 and cut.1 should look similar to Figure 14.5: Object Face: face.1
(plate2.2 Temperature) (p. 302) and Figure 14.6: Plane Cut: cut.1 (Z Plane Through Center Velo-
city) (p. 303).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 301
Zoom-In Modeling in ANSYS Workbench
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
302 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Create a Zoom-In Model
2. Save all the post-processing objects created. Go to Post → Save post objects to file. Save it with the
default file name post_objects to be used in the future.
1. Go to Post → Create zoom-in model. The Zoom-in modeling panel appears. The boundaries for the
zoom-in also appear in the ANSYS Icepak main window as a bold white box. By default this zoom-in box
is coincidental with the cabinet.
2. Resize this box by entering the values shown in Figure 14.7: The Zoom-in modeling Setup Panel (p. 304)
into the zoom-in window. Change Max Y to Outflow and both Min Z and Max Z to Wall. Note that the
zoom-in box now surrounds plate.1.2 and plate.2.2 and includes portions of some on the remaining
system level model objects (Figure 14.8: Zoom-in Box (p. 305)). There needs to be one outflow to com-
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 303
Zoom-In Modeling in ANSYS Workbench
pensate for slight differences in flow with a pressure differential. The wall objects are created since the
entire face on that side is created in a solid or on a solid surface.
Note
The coordinates for each of the zoom-in boundaries can also be specified by clicking the
Select button to the right of the appropriate text entry box and clicking the left mouse
button on the desired point in the graphics display window. You may want to orient your
view depending upon the coordinate being selected to ensure a more accurate selection.
The boundaries of the zoom-in model will be displayed in the graphics window as you
update them.
3. Click Accept to create the zoom-in model. Since many of the parts in the zoom-in model extend out of
the zoom-in box, a warning message window should appear listing a set of objects that lie outside.
4. In the Objects overlapping dialog box, click the Resize button to resize these parts to fit into the zoom-
in model. ANSYS Icepak writes out a zoom-in model called IcepakProj.zoom_in. ANSYS Icepak reports
on the operations to construct the model and creates the profiles in the ANSYS Icepak messages window.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
304 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Create a Zoom-In Model
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 305
Zoom-In Modeling in ANSYS Workbench
Note
Click Update Project in ANSYS Workbench to update the setup and solution data before
creating a new Icepak template. This will mesh and solve your Icepak model again.
2. Right-click the Icepak Setup cell (B2), select Import Icepak Project and Browse....
3. In the Select Folder file selection dialog, select the zoom-in model called IcepakProj.zoom_in. (It will
be in the same location as the folder for the system level model.) In the system level model we used a
single conducting thick plate to represent the components. We can now replace the plate.2.2 by the
individual components.
4. Double-click plate.2.2 to open the Plates panel and make the following changes:
b. In the Geometry tab, change your settings to match those in Figure 14.10: Plates Panel for Object
Chip (Geometry Tab) (p. 307).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
306 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Edit the Zoom-in Model
c. Select and highlight all three Chip plates in the Model manager window.
d. Make three copies of the three plates with an Y offset set to 0.07 m in the same way you copied
the single chip.
f. Delete two of the components (Chip.1.3 and Chip.4) and to form the pattern shown in Fig-
ure 14.11: Schematic of the Completed Zoom-in Model (p. 308).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 307
Zoom-In Modeling in ANSYS Workbench
3. While in the Global tab, change your mesh settings to those of Figure 14.12: Zoom-in Mesh control
Panel (p. 309).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
308 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 11: Zoom-In Physical and Numerical Settings
4. Generate the mesh and then display and check the mesh quality from the Display tab. Make sure to
deselect the Display mesh option when you are done.
2. Delete the monitor point plate.2.2 brought in from the system level model since it no longer exists as
an object. Also delete any other monitor points beside Chip.5 and Chip.2.3.
3. Go to Solution settings → Basic settings to change the maximum number of iterations to 300.
4. Solve the model by selecting Solve → Run solution and by clicking Start solution under the General
setup tab.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 309
Zoom-In Modeling in ANSYS Workbench
Figure 14.13: Object Faces face.1 and face.2 (p. 311) shows the two object faces simultaneously.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
310 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 13: Summary
We repeat some of the tips and best practices found in this tutorial for your convenience:
1. Best Practices
a. Use zoom-in modeling when analyzing a complicated system to refine the individual modeling of
complex sub-systems.
b. Manage your project from ANSYS Workbench when performing zoom-in modeling.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 311
Zoom-In Modeling in ANSYS Workbench
c. Specify object-specific meshing parameters for local mesh refinement in regions with high gradients.
a. Specify the parameters of multiple objects simultaneously by selecting all the desired objects in the
node tree of the Per-object meshing parameters panel then making the required parameter specific-
ations. Note that you can only do this to objects of similar type and orientation.
b. Use the Problem setup wizard for guided problem setup. Edit the problem setup if needed using
the Basic parameters panel.
c. Select Sequential solution of flow and energy equations in the Solve panel when you are not
considering the effects of natural convection. This reduces the solution time required by converging
the flow equations before the energy equation rather than simultaneous computation on each iteration.
You can then perform a comparison study in ANSYS CFD-Post by creating a third Icepak component.
This time, duplicate the first Icepak component and link this component to the available Results com-
ponent. Post-process the results in ANSYS CFD-Post and compare them to the results containing the
PCB plate object.
1. Save the IcepakProj.zoom_in model with a new model name such as rack.zoom_in_merge. Double-
click the Icepak component module’s name (component B) and then enter rack.zoom_in_merge for
the module name.
2. Delete all the components within the model except all the plates which represents the PCB and the chips
and re-save the model. This version has all the unnecessary components for the system merge removed.)
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
312 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 15: Additional Exercise 2
5. Use File → Merge Project to import rack.zoom_in_merge into this model with all the details of the
chips.
Note
There will be two projects in the rack-new_files folder, IPK and IPK-1. Select IcepakProj
located at dp0/IPK-1/Icepak.
6. Deactivate the old components residing where the merged components are (plate.1.2 and plate.2.2).
7. Create a non-conformal assembly containing all the chips and the board. Use slack values between 3-5
mm in every direction for the assembly. These are good values to start without violating any of the non-
conformal meshing rules.
8. Finally, mesh and run the model with a different Solution ID and compare the results to the previously
obtained ones. Verify that the results are very comparable.
Figure 14.14: Temperature Comparison: Zoom-in Model with Conformal Meshing vs. System with
Non-conformal Assembly (p. 314) shows a temperature comparison between the zoom-in model and
the system-level model with a non-conformal assembly. While the temperatures are slightly different,
the overall distribution (hot spots) stay the same.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 313
Zoom-In Modeling in ANSYS Workbench
Figure 14.14: Temperature Comparison: Zoom-in Model with Conformal Meshing vs. System
with Non-conformal Assembly
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
314 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 15: IDF Import
15.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates the IDF import capability of ANSYS Icepak.
• Apply the various options offered in ANSYS Icepak’s IDF import capability.
15.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you are familiar with the menu structure in ANSYS Icepak and that you have
solved or read the tutorial Finned Heat Sink. If you have not, review Sample Session in the Icepak User’s
Guide.
This tutorial does not involve generating a mesh, calculating a solution or examining results. These
steps will not be shown in this tutorial.
When ANSYS Icepak starts, the Welcome to Icepak panel opens automatically.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 315
IDF Import
2. Click New in the Welcome to Icepak panel to start a new ANSYS Icepak project.
b. Click Create.
1. In the IDF import panel, click the Browse button next to the Board file (ascii) field and select the file
brd_board.emn from your Icepak installation folder. Board files have the extension “*.emn" or “*.brd".
Note that the library file (brd_board.emp) is loaded automatically (Figure 15.2: IDF import Panel - Load
files (p. 317)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
316 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
2. Click Next and go on to the Layout options section (Figure 15.3: IDF import Panel - Layout options (p. 318)).
• Board properties - Click Edit button to access the Board properties where you can enter details such
as number of trace layers, coverage, layer thickness, and so on. Layer properties refer to the average
properties of all internal layers. In this example, examine the defaults, and click Cancel to close the
Board properties panel.
Note
More advanced PCB models are covered in the introductory tutorial, RF Amplifier, and
the application tutorial, Trace Layer Import for Printed Circuit Boards, located in the
Icepak tutorials guide.
• Drilled holes are for positioning purposes and usually are not important to the thermal physics of the
model. During the import, they can be ignored. By default, ANSYS Icepak leaves the Import drilled
holes check box deselected under Detailed options group box.
• Select Make all components rectangular under the Detailed options group box to convert all
polygonal components to rectangular prisms.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 317
IDF Import
3. Click Next to go to the Component filters section (Figure 15.4: IDF import Panel - Component fil-
ters (p. 318)). Components can be filtered either by size and power or by component type. For now, select
Filter by component type and Import all components. The other options will be explained in more
detail at the end of the tutorial.
4. Click Next to go to the Component models section (Figure 15.5: IDF import Panel - Component mod-
els (p. 319)).
5. Select Model all components as and keep the default settings. The option Choose specific component
model will be discussed later in the tutorial.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
318 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
6. Click Next to go to the Miscellaneous options section (Figure 15.6: IDF import Panel - Miscellaneous
options (p. 320)). Select Append Part Name to Reference Designator under the Naming conventions
group box.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 319
IDF Import
8. Examine the summary of the IDF import that appears (Figure 15.7: IDF Import Summary (p. 320)). Click
Dismiss to close the panel.
9. Examine the imported model (Figure 15.8: IDF Imported Model with All Components (p. 321)).
Observe:
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
320 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Component Filtration Alternatives
Note that:
• You can use the Edit feature under the Groups node in the Model manager window to change
the properties for all the components in the same group simultaneously.
• Check the text window for missing properties. Any missing values likely originate from the imported
files. You may ignore them in this tutorial since you will not actually run the solver, but you can define
them later if desired.
Figure 15.8: IDF Imported Model with All Components (p. 321) shows the ANSYS Icepak model with
components modeled as 3D objects (solid blocks or two-resistor network blocks). Appropriate
boundary conditions need to be applied before starting thermal analysis. In addition, you can review
power values by selecting the Power and temperature limits option in the Model menu.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 321
IDF Import
2. If Filter by component type is chosen (Figure 15.10: IDF Import Panel - Component filters: Filter by
component type (p. 322)), the required components can be selected through the Component selection
panel (Figure 15.11: Component selection Panel (p. 322)); otherwise all the components are included
during the import. The Component selection panel contains reference designators for all components.
Figure 15.10: IDF Import Panel - Component filters: Filter by component type
After clicking Choose, you can choose individual components from the panel in the figure below:
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
322 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Component Models Alternatives
2. The Choose specific component model option is available when filtering by component type. ANSYS
Icepak allows the component property to be added if no thermal information is available from the IDF
file (IDF 2.0), or modify properties if it is available (IDF 3.0).
3. Under Choose specific component model, properties of required components can be loaded from an
existing file using the Load data from file option. The format for the file is:
Figure 15.12: Set Component Property Using File (p. 323) shows a sample file. Objects not present in
the file are imported with data already present in the IDF file, or as solid blocks with no power
specification.
4. Component properties may also be edited manually by selecting the Specify values for individual
component types option. The components to be imported are listed under Selected components. The
component name is composed of the type and name and the number of copies, followed by a more
descriptive part name (Figure 15.13: Manual Selection of Component Models (p. 324)). To manually set
the component property, you can select the component in the Selected components list. Multiple se-
lections can be made by pressing Ctrl, or Shift, along with the left mouse button. Then, you can choose
the model type: Rjc-Rjb (two resistors), 3d blocks, or 2d sources. Furthermore, you can specify the
power dissipation. For a two-resistor model, Rjc and Rjb values need to be specified as well. After inputting
your specifications, click Apply to complete the modification.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 323
IDF Import
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
324 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 16: Modeling CAD Geometry
16.1. Introduction
Complex geometries are common in today’s electronics cooling applications. Examples include complex
enclosure shapes, heat sink fins, grilles, and so on. Proper accounting of the geometry of these objects
is important for accurate prediction of flow and heat transfer. Modeling of these complex geometries
is possible by using the direct CAD modeling feature in ANSYS Icepak. The hex-dominant mesher is re-
quired for CAD geometry and thus used to create an unstructured mesh for these complex shapes.
This tutorial demonstrates how to use the hex-dominant mesher to create an unstructured mesh for
complex shapes in ANSYS Icepak.
• Use a CAD object and create an unstructured mesh using the hex-dominant mesher.
• Solve for flow and heat transfer in a model with CAD geometry.
• Examine contours and vectors on object faces and on cross-sections of the model.
16.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have little experience with ANSYS Icepak, but that you are generally fa-
miliar with the interface. If you are not, review Sample Session in the Icepak User’s Guide.
1
The heat sink used for this sample problem was obtained from the company Alpha, www.alphanovatech.com/cindexe.html#w.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 325
Modeling CAD Geometry
Figure 16.1: Wind Tunnel Model with Heatsink Modeled as CAD Block
When ANSYS Icepak starts, the Welcome to Icepak panel opens automatically.
2. Click New in the Welcome to Icepak panel to start a new ANSYS Icepak project.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
326 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
b. Click Create.
Note
ANSYS Icepak creates a default cabinet with the dimensions 1 m × 1 m × 1 m and displays
the cabinet in the graphics window.
b. Select Load in the CAD data panel and click Load IGES/Step file (Figure 16.2: CAD data Panel (p. 328)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 327
Modeling CAD Geometry
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
328 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
2. In the CAD data panel, select the surfaces to be used to create the CAD block.
a. In the Creation mode section of the CAD data panel, ensure the Selected option is selected.
d. Drag a rectangular region around the displayed CAD model to select the surfaces to be used to create
the CAD block. Clicking the middle mouse button creates the block (F_4074 or a similar name) which
can be used in the ANSYS Icepak model. Click the middle mouse button again to skip material spe-
cification. Click None in the Families group box to deactivate the display of the CAD data.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 329
Modeling CAD Geometry
Model → Cabinet
b. Under Location, enter the Start / end coordinates shown in Table 16.1: Coordinates for the Cabin-
et (p. 330) :
Important
xS -100 mm xE 150 mm
yS -5 mm yE 20 mm
zS -25 mm zE 25 mm
d. In the Orient menu, select Isometric view to scale and orient the view of the cabinet to fit the
graphics window (Figure 16.3: Creating the Heat Sink CAD Block From a CAD File (p. 331)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
330 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Figure 16.3: Creating the Heat Sink CAD Block From a CAD File
4. Edit the cabinet properties to specify the Min x and Max x sides as openings.
a. Select Opening from the drop-down menu under Wall type for Min x and Max x.
b. Select Edit to display the Openings object panel for Min x and specify the X Velocity to be 5 m/s.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 331
Modeling CAD Geometry
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
332 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
ANSYS Icepak creates a new solid prism block in the center of the cabinet. You need to change
the size of the block.
d. Enter the Start / end coordinates for the Prism block as shown in Table 16.2: Coordinates for the
Block (p. 333).
Important
xS -30 mm xE 30 mm
yS -5 mm yE 0 mm
zS -25 mm zE 25 mm
The block touches the cabinet on the Min Y face and the heat sink on the Max Y face. The Min
Z and Max Z faces of the block touch the cabinet.
e. In the Properties tab, select Solid for the Block type if not already selected. Under Thermal specific-
ation, keep default (Al-Extruded) as the Solid material.
6. Create a source between the base block and the heat sink.
b. Edit the source Geometry with the Start / end dimensions given in Table 16.3: Coordinates for the
Source (p. 333).
Important
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 333
Modeling CAD Geometry
d. Click Done to modify the source property and close the panel.
Note
You will allow heat transfer from the base of the metal block by creating a wall, wall.1
on the Min y side of the block and the cabinet boundary.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
334 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
a. Edit the wall Geometry with Start / end dimensions given in Table 16.4: Coordinates for the
Wall (p. 335).
Important
b. Edit the wall Properties to specify the boundary conditions of the wall.
i. Select Heat transfer coefficient from the External conditions drop-down list.
ii. Click Edit to open the Wall external thermal conditions panel.
iii. Select Heat transfer coeff in the Thermal conditions group box.
iv. Input a Heat transfer coeff of 10.0 W/K-m2 and keep the default selection of Constant in the
Heat transfer coefficient group box. The Ref temperature is ambient.
Tip
By default, the ambient temperature is 20.0°C. You can edit the ambient temper-
ature in the Defaults tab of the Basic parameters panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 335
Modeling CAD Geometry
v. Click Done in the Wall external thermal conditions panel and then in the Walls object panel
to apply the changes and close the panels.
The final model should correspond to the one shown in Figure 16.1: Wind Tunnel Model with Heatsink
Modeled as CAD Block (p. 326).
a. Select the heat sink (F_4074 or similar name) and source.1 from the Model manager window
and create an assembly called assembly.1.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
336 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Generate a Mesh
b. The meshing parameters for this assembly are shown in Figure 16.5: Meshing Parameters for as-
sembly.1 (p. 337).
Important
Note
The slacks in the Min Z and Max Z directions can be specified by snapping with the
cabinet boundary in the respective directions. Note the use of Max element size in
each direction to control the mesh refinement in the assembly.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 337
Modeling CAD Geometry
2. Create another separately meshed assembly to enable a smooth transition of the fine mesh inside as-
sembly.1 to the relatively coarse mesh in the outer region of the model. This smooth transition will
help reduce interpolation error due to highly dissimilar grid densities.
Tip
For a first cut solution, the maximum ratio of cells between the fine and coarse meshes
should be 10:1 at the interface between the two meshes. For models requiring more ac-
curacy, such as in mesh independence studies, this max ratio should be 5:1. You can
visually inspect this ratio yourself by examining the displayed mesh.
a. Choose assembly.1, block.1, and wall.1 from the Model manager window and create as-
sembly.2.
b. The meshing parameters for this assembly are shown in Figure 16.6: Meshing Parameters for as-
sembly.2 (p. 339).
Important
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
338 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Generate a Mesh
Note
There is a larger max element size in this assembly compared to that in assembly.1
to reduce the grid density.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 339
Modeling CAD Geometry
a. Keep the default selection of Mesher-HD for the Mesh type and input the settings shown in Fig-
ure 16.7: Mesh control Panel Inputs (p. 340) below.
Important
Note
When meshing models containing CAD blocks, you could select Hexa unstructured
or Hexa cartesian for the global Mesh type, but only Mesher-HD can be used to
mesh CAD blocks. Therefore, you must create assemblies with Mesher-HD as the
Mesh type around all the CAD blocks when the global mesher is not hex-dominant.
4. The surface mesh on the heat sink and the mesh on the center Y plane is shown in Figure 16.8: Mesh
Near Heat Sink (p. 341). The relatively coarse mesh in the overall cabinet, the intermediate mesh in as-
sembly.2 and the fine mesh in assembly.1 is clearly seen in the central “y" plane view of the mesh
as shown in Figure 16.9: Y-Plane View of Mesh (p. 341).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
340 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Generate a Mesh
Note
Closely examine the interface between the innermost mesh of assembly.1 and that
of assembly.2. The ratio of cells between the two meshes is less than 3. The next in-
terface (between assembly.2 and the outermost region) has a ratio between 12 and
13. In practice, you should create another nested assembly for a smoother transition at
the outermost interface. For the sake of brevity in the tutorial, however, the current ratios
are sufficient.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 341
Modeling CAD Geometry
Note
Instead of accessing the Basic parameters panel, you can instead use the Problem setup
wizard to define your problem setup by double-clicking Problem setup in the model
manager window. See 2.7. Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings of the Finned Heat Sink
tutorial for more instruction regarding the Problem setup wizard. You must still use the
same settings described in this tutorial for the Problem setup wizard.
a. In the General Setup tab, make sure that both the flow and the temperature fields are activated.
Note
This is a forced convection problem; therefore the natural convection as well as radi-
ation effects can be ignored.
b. Select Off in the Radiation group box and ensure Gravity vector is deselected.
c. Choose Turbulent in the Flow regime group box. Keep the default turbulence model of Zero
equation.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
342 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings
Note
Since you are modeling the problem without natural convection and thus without
the coupling of the energy and flow equations, allow ANSYS Icepak to solve the flow
and energy equations sequentially. Because the flow and energy equations do not
have to be solved together for every iteration, the convergence rate will increase
significantly.
2. Under Solution settings → Basic settings, specify the number of iterations to be 300, the Flow
convergence to be 0.001 and the Energy convergence criterion to be 1e-14, as shown in Figure 16.10: Ba-
sic settings Panel (p. 344). Click Accept to save the settings and close the panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 343
Modeling CAD Geometry
Note
A more stringent energy convergence criterion is required when the energy equation is
solved separately of the flow equations. You will also use a more appropriate multigrid
cycle scheme for the energy equation than the default, as shown in the next step.
3. Adjust the solver settings to account for the sequential solution of the flow and energy equations.
a. Make sure that the Under-relaxation parameters for Pressure and Momentum are 0.3 and 0.7,
respectively.
b. Input the following for Temperature in the Linear solver group box:
Tip
Refer to 34.5. Selecting the Multigrid Scheme of the Icepak User’s Guide for more
information on multigrid cycle types.
ii. Enter 1e-6 for the Termination criterion and the Residual reduction tolerance.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
344 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Save the Model
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 345
Modeling CAD Geometry
Note
You can click the save project button ( ) in the File commands toolbar.
a. Select Sequential solution of flow and energy equations to solve the flow and energy equations
separately.
ANSYS Icepak begins to calculate a solution for the model, and a separate window opens where
the solver prints the numerical values of the residuals. ANSYS Icepak also opens the Solution
residuals graphics display and control window, where it displays the convergence history for
the calculation.
Note
The actual values of the residuals may differ slightly on different machines, so your
plot may not look exactly the same as Figure 16.12: Residuals (p. 347).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
346 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
b. Click Show contours and then Parameters to open the Object face contours panel.
d. Keep the default selection of Solid fill in the Contours of group box.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 347
Modeling CAD Geometry
f. Keep the default selection of Calculated in the Color levels group box and choose This object from
the drop-down list.
g. Press Done in the Object face contours panel and then in the Object face panel to close the panels
and view the post-processing object.
This maps the color range to the temperature distribution on the heat sink. You can see the temper-
ature on a given point using the surface probe tool.
Figure 16.14: Temperature Distribution on the Heat Sink (p. 349) shows the temperature distribution
on the heat sink.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
348 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
2. Right-click face.1 in the Model manager window and deselect Active to deactivate the post-processing
object.
a. Select Y plane through center from the Set position drop-down list.
The velocity field around the heat sinks fins, visualized on the central Y plane, is shown in Fig-
ure 16.15: Velocity Field Around the Heat Sinks Fins (p. 350).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 349
Modeling CAD Geometry
We repeat some of the tips and best practices found in this tutorial for your convenience:
• Best Practices
– Use the hex-dominant mesher (Mesher-HD) whenever you have CAD geometries in your model. This
is required for CAD objects. For most geometries, Mesher-HD is also the preferred option.
– Create nested assemblies for smooth transitions between meshes of highly different grid densities.
– Have a max ratio of 10:1 cells between a coarse and a fine mesh for a first cut solution. For mesh inde-
pendence studies, have a max ratio of 5:1 cells.
– Create stringent energy convergence criteria when using the sequential solution scheme of the flow
and energy equations.
• Tip
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
350 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Summary
– Select Sequential solution of flow and energy equations in the Solve panel when you are not con-
sidering the effects of natural convection. This reduces the solution time required by converging the
flow equations before the energy equation rather than simultaneous computation on every iteration.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 351
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
352 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 17: Trace Layer Import for Printed Circuit Boards
17.1. Introduction
A printed circuit board (PCB) is generally a multi-layered board made of dielectric material and several
layers of copper traces. From the thermal modeling point of view, a PCB may be treated as a homogen-
eous material with bi-directional thermal conductivity, i.e. thermal conductivity value is different in the
normal-to-plane direction than that of the in-plane direction. This approach is reasonable as long as
the trace distribution is more-or-less uniform in any given layer. However, with the continuing challenges
to increase product functionality while decreasing product size, designers are compelled to place more
and more functionality on individual PCB’s. As PCB’s become more densely populated, their trace layers
are becoming more non-uniform and it is prudent to use locally varying thermal conductivity information
on the board.
PCBs often have large copper spread in the power and ground planes, this along with the presence of
vias (especially thermal vias) can be effectively used by the designer to spread heat from the package.
A detailed conductivity map of the pcb is required to simulate heat transfer, which is possible in Ansys
Icepak using the trace feature.
Conducting a computational heat transfer simulation for each individual layer is costly and impractical
for a system level model. In ANSYS Icepak, it is possible to import trace layout of the board and compute
locally varying orthotropic conductivity ( , , , and ) on the board using a profile mesh size. The
supported file formats are (1) MCM, BRD and TCB files and (created using Cadence, Synopsys, Zuken,
and Mentor), (2) ANF files and (3) ODB++ files.
Ansoftlinks installation and licensing are required to create ANF files to be read by Icepak. Icepak can
read ODB++ files, but an Ansoftlinks license is required. To import MCM/BRD files, Cadence Allegro
must be installed.
• How to import trace layout of a typical PCB in TCB format and solve two sample cases based on the trace
layout information.
17.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you are familiar with the menu structure in ANSYS Icepak and that you have
solved or read the tutorial Finned Heat Sink. Some steps in the setup and solution procedure will not
be shown explicitly.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 353
Trace Layer Import for Printed Circuit Boards
When ANSYS Icepak starts, the Welcome to Icepak panel opens automatically.
2. Click New in the Welcome to Icepak panel to start a new ANSYS Icepak project.
b. Click Create.
1. In the IDF import panel, select the board (A1.bdf ). Specify the model directory using Browse.
2. Select Next to see your Layout options. Keep Detail for the Import type, XY for the board plane and
Rectangular for the board shape.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
354 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Note
Because we import the trace information later, we do not need to edit the board properties
at this time.
3. Select Next to see the Component filtering options. Ensure Import all components is selected.
Note
You can filter certain components at this step by their size and power information, i.e.
you can ignore the small components or the ones dissipating low power. We will import
all of the components in this tutorial.
4. Select Next to see the Component models section. Select Model all components as. Keep the default
selection of 3d blocks and the default Cutoff height for modeling components as 3d blocks.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 355
Trace Layer Import for Printed Circuit Boards
Note
If you have thin components on your board, they can be modeled as 2D sources. In this
tutorial, we would like to model all the components as rectangular blocks.
5. Click Next to go to the Miscellaneous options section where you can specify the naming and monitor
options. Keep the default options and click Finish to start importing the files. This will take some time
depending on the speed of your machine.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
356 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
You have learned how to import board and library files, and in general you can import any IDF file
by using the procedure above.
The next step in building the model is to import the trace files. A pre-built board model named
“A11" (see Figure 17.1: A11 Board Layout (p. 358)) will be used to demonstrate the trace file import.
This pre-built model was extracted from the previous board file (A11.brd), a number of small com-
ponents were removed and a non-conformal assembly was formed.
a. Unpack A11.tzr file to your desktop and name the project “A11".
Note
As mentioned earlier, the trace file (.brd, .tcb, .mcm, .anf, or .odb++) can either be
imported during the IDF file import or the trace layout information can be assigned
to the board after importing the IDF file.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 357
Trace Layer Import for Printed Circuit Boards
b. Right click BOARD_OUTLINE.1 located in the board assembly in the Model manager window and
click Edit to display the Printed circuit boards object panel.
i. In the Geometry tab, select Ansoft Neutral ANF from the Import ECAD file drop down list
(Figure 17.2: Printed circuit boards [BOARD_OUTLINE.1] Panel (p. 359)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
358 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
ii. Select A1.anf from the Trace file panel. This process may take a few minutes depending on the
speed of your computer.
Note
iii. Once the import process is completed, you can edit the layer information in the Board layer and
via information panel (Figure 17.3: Importing Trace Layout and Editing Layer Information (p. 361)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 359
Trace Layer Import for Printed Circuit Boards
The number of layers in the board will automatically be imported to ANSYS Icepak and you
will have to enter the thickness of each layer and the material type. In this tutorial, the metal
layers are pure Cu and the dielectric layers are FR-4.
iv. Enter the layer thickness as shown in Table 17.1: Thickness Information on the Board (Layer 1: Top,
Layer 7: Bottom layers) (p. 360).
Table 17.1: Thickness Information on the Board (Layer 1: Top, Layer 7: Bottom layers)
The grid density is specified By count: and By size:. To determine the optimal grid density
find the smallest trace width in the x and y directions. Review the via diameters and see that
the minimum via diameter is 0.254mm. The length of the PCB in the x-direction is 166.6mm
and 109.1mm in the y-direction. Divide the length of the PCB by the minimum via diameter
to determine the optimal grid density in the x and y directions. Select By count: and change
the number of rows and columns to 656 x 430.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
360 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
v. By default, the Model layers separately option is on when importing traces using a pcb object.
Click Accept to close the panel. In the Printed circuit boards [BOARD_OUTLINE.1] panel, click
Edit... across from Trace layers and vias to display the Board layer and via information panel.
The Model layers separately option is on. Click the Don’t recompute metal fractions option
to turn it off.
vi. Via information (e.g., material, plating thickness, filled/un-filled, via diameter etc.) is imported
automatically (Figure 17.4: Vias Information (p. 362)), keep the default settings.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 361
Trace Layer Import for Printed Circuit Boards
Note
The background mesh matrix (rows and columns) is used to compute the ortho-
tropic conductivity on the board. The rows represent the division of the board in
the y-direction, the columns represent the division of the board in the x-direction
and the size field determines the divisions of the board and indicates the grid size
in each direction. The values of , , , and on each cell are determined by
the local trace density and the direction. ANSYS Icepak does not include the trace
geometry in the physical model; however, the locally varying orthotropic conduct-
ivity is mapped from the background mesh to the physical model mesh. Once the
trace file is imported and assigned to the board geometry, the trace layers are
associated with the board and are moved (in translation and/or rotation) with the
board object.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
362 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
ix. Right click on the object BOARD_OUTLINE.1 and go to Traces from the menu.
Note
You can view the traces in three different ways, i.e. single color, color by layer,
or color by trace. Each of the trace layers can be viewed separately by switching
the visible option on or off in the layers part of the panel. (Figure 17.5: Displaying
Traces on the Board (p. 363)).
x. Select color by trace; the board traces are as shown in Figure 17.6: Trace Layout on the PCB with
the Color by trace Option (p. 364).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 363
Trace Layer Import for Printed Circuit Boards
Figure 17.6: Trace Layout on the PCB with the Color by trace Option
You can view the location of individual trace layers as shown in Figure 17.7: Displaying Trace
Layers (p. 364) by enabling the Display traces in 3D option in the Preferences panel.
After enabling Display traces in 3D option, select This project in the Preferences panel,
zoom in and display the positive Y view of your model.
xi. View the fraction of metal traces based on the grid density entered above. Go to the Model menu
and select Show metal fractions. In the Show metal fractions panel, select BOARD_OUTLINE.1
across from Object with traces. The other fields will be automatically filled with the PCB inform-
ation.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
364 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 1: Generate a Mesh
1. Make all objects (including the openings) inactive except the BOARD_OUTLINE.1 object.
2. Select the cabinet and select Autoscale from the Edit window to make the size of the board and the
cabinet the same.
3. Go to the Properties tab of the Cabinet object panel, and select Wall from the Min z and Max z drop-
down lists.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 365
Trace Layer Import for Printed Circuit Boards
a. In the Properties tab, select Temperature from the External conditions drop-down list, and keep
the ambient temperature (20°C).
a. In the Properties tab, specify a Heat flux of 20000 W/m2 in the Thermal specification group box.
Note
The rest of the sides are insulated. The board will be simulated using a conduction-only
model.
b. Specify a Max element size for X, Y, and Z as 5, 3, and 0.05 mm respectively, and a Minimum gap
for X, Y, and Z as 1, 1, and 0.01 mm respectively.
8. Once the mesh has been created, Close the Mesh control panel.
a. Since this is a conduction only model, toggle off the Flow option in the General setup tab.
b. Make sure Radiation is off and keep all other default values.
a. Keep the default Number of iterations and set the Convergence criteria for Energy to 1e-12.
a. Input the following for Temperature in the Linear solver group box:
ii. Enter 1e-6 for both the Termination criterion and Residual reduction tolerance.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
366 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Examine the Results
Go to Solve → Run solution or click on the shortcut button ( ). Enter a Solution ID such as
A11–656x430. Start the solver by clicking Start solution.
2. Edit cut.1 and make sure that Set position is Point and normal.
3. Make sure that PX, PY, PZ are 0, 0, and 0.78232, respectively and the NX, NY, and NZ are 0, 0, and 1,
respectively.
The mid-plane temperature distribution shows that the high temperature regions occur at the no-trace
areas and low temperature regions occur at areas with a high trace concentration. This is expected as
the copper content is directly proportional to the trace concentration. It is worth noting that if a compact
or detailed PCB were used in lieu of the traced PCB, one would obtain a fixed temperature for the entire
mid-plane and this fixed temperature would be different from the average temperature of the traced
PCB on the same plane.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 367
Trace Layer Import for Printed Circuit Boards
Note
The spatially varying non-uniform conductivity of the board can also be viewed during post
processing. The conductivities in the three direction , , and are available as post-
processing variables with plane cuts and object faces. Figure 17.10: K_X Distribution on the
PCB (mid-plane) (p. 369) plots at the board mid-plane by selecting K_X from the Contours
of drop-down list from Plane cut contours panel of the cut.1 object. In the present case,
because the layers are modeled separately, there is a variation of the conductivities in the
board-normal direction.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
368 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
PCB With the Actual Components Under Forced Convection
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 369
Trace Layer Import for Printed Circuit Boards
3. If not already defined, assign an X Velocity of -1.5 m/s in the Properties tab of the Openings panel for
the Max x side of the cabinet (the minus sign shows that the flow is in the negative x direction).
4. Open the Mesh control panel and choose X, Y, Z sizes as 9.5, 7, and 0.7 mm respectively.
2. Go to Solution settings → Basic settings and make sure the Number of iterations is 300 and
that the Convergence criteria are the same as the last mode, and press Accept to close the panel.
1. Once the model has converged, deactivate cut.1 and go to Post → Object Face.
5. For Color levels, select This object from the drop-down list.
6. Press Done in the Object face contours panel and then the Object face panel to view the postprocessing
object.
This shows the temperature distribution at the top of the surface of the board (Figure 17.11: Top
Surface Temperature Distribution: PCB With Imported Traces in Forced Convection (p. 371)). There
are hot spots underneath the high heat flux components.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
370 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Additional Exercise 1
Figure 17.11: Top Surface Temperature Distribution: PCB With Imported Traces in Forced
Convection
17.17. Summary
In this tutorial, you imported the board layout and trace files. Then you simulated the board using a
conduction only model using a grid density of 656 x 430. Postprocessing this model showed high
temperature regions occurring at the no-trace areas and low temperature regions occurring at areas
with a high trace concentration. Then you simulated the board with the components put back into the
model and simulated under forced convection..
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 371
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
372 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 18: Joule/Trace Heating
18.1. Introduction
In the tutorial Trace Layer Import for Printed Circuit Boards (p. 353), you learned how to import a trace
layout of a typical PCB using the ANF format and also learned how to model the trace layers separately
for better modeling accuracy. In this tutorial, you will learn how to model resistive heating or Joule
heating of the imported traces in the PCB.
Since PCB traces have electrical resistance, they heat up as current flows through them. Modeling this
phenomenon will provide us with an accurate prediction of the temperature distribution in the PCB,
which can be important, for example, in evaluating the performance of the cooling system.
18.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have completed the tutorial Trace Layer Import for Printed Circuit
Boards (p. 353) of this guide. This same model is used to determine the Joule/trace heating capability
in ANSYS Icepak.
Note
When ANSYS Icepak starts, the Welcome to Icepak panel will open automatically.
2. Click Unpack in the Welcome to Icepak panel to start a new ANSYS Icepak project.
Note
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 373
Joule/Trace Heating
3. In the File selection panel, select the packed project file Joule-heating.tzr (found in your Icepak
installation folder) and click Open.
Note
4. In the Location for the unpacked project panel, select a directory where you would like to place the
packed project file, enter a project name in the New Project text field, and click Unpack.
Note
Table 18.1: Thickness Information on the Board (Layer 1: Top, Layer 7: Bottom layers)
You will work directly on the Joule heating capability in ANSYS Icepak
a. Right click on the object BOARD_OUTLINE.1 and click on Traces in the context menu. You can
view the traces in three different ways and select Off to remove the display.
b. You can also view individual traces or nets by selecting Traces from the View menu and clicking on
Trace info. As you click on different areas in the graphics display window, the trace name and
number will appear. Click on the right or middle mouse button when you are done. In the steps below,
you will create a solid trace from one of these traces.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
374 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
c. Open the BOARD_OUTLINE.1 edit panel. In the Geometry tab, click the Edit button next to Model
trace heating. The Trace heating panel opens.
i. In the drop-down list under Layers, select INT1_3. The list in the Display traces group box shows
available traces. You can filter the traces to view by setting an Area filter (the default in ANSYS
Icepak is 20% of the Largest trace area) and clicking the Filter button. In this example, use an
Area filter of 4124 mm2, as this will only show the significant traces.
Note
The “trace area” of a trace is the area interior to that trace. The Trace heating
panel lists the traces in each layer in order of descending area, see Figure 18.1: Trace
Heating Panel Selection and Options (p. 376).
ii. Before you create a solid trace of trace A3V3_151, you need to modify the Max angle filter and
the Min length filter to ignore the fine details in the trace geometry and reduce the mesh count.
If you have not done so already, select trace A3V3_151 and set the Max angle filter to 135 and
the Min length filter to 1.0 mm. These settings determine the creation and geometry of a trace
block modeling the trace.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 375
Joule/Trace Heating
iii. Click the Create solid trace button. ANSYS Icepak will create a polygonal solid block named
BOARD_OUTLINE.layer-3-trace-A3V3_151 that contains the trace information. (The actual
name may vary). Click Done to close the Trace heating panel.
Note
You can try reducing the Area filter to 1000 mm2 to check how many traces
appear. We are interested in the largest trace, trace A3V3_151.
d. Click Done in the Printed circuit boards panel to close the panel and view the model (Figure 18.2: Sol-
id Block Created for Trace A3V3_151 (p. 377)). Note that the shaded object in the figure below is the
block you have just created for trace A3V3_151.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
376 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
2. Select the polygonal trace just created from the Model manager window and open the Blocks panel.
a. In the Geometry tab of the Blocks panel, make sure there are approximately 115 vertices for the
trace, as shown in Figure 18.3: Polygonal Trace Block (p. 378).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 377
Joule/Trace Heating
i. Make sure that the Solid material is tr_A3V3_151_sol_mat and then select Edit definition
in the drop-down list.
B. Make sure the Properties tab of the Materials panel looks like those in Figure 18.4: Trace
Materials Panel — Properties Tab (p. 379).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
378 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
ii. In order to activate Joule heating of the trace, press the Edit button for the Joule option. The
Joule heating power panel opens.
B. For the first boundary condition in the Boundary conditions group box, set Side to side93,
Boundary type to current, and specify the Current to 25.0 Amp.
C. For the second boundary condition, set Side to side113, Boundary type to voltage, and
the Voltage to 0.0 V.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 379
Joule/Trace Heating
Note
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
380 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Generate a Mesh
Figure 18.6: Entry and Exit Sides for the Trace Block
Note
The side numbers are estimates as they may be slightly different for each
model.
D. Press Done in the Joule heating power panel and then the Blocks panel to close the panels
and view the model.
Note
The mesh priority of the trace block must be greater than the mesh priority of the
PCB.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 381
Joule/Trace Heating
i. In the Meshing tab, select Mesh separately and input the Slack settings, Mesh type, Max ele-
ment size, Min gap and Global specifications settings as shown in Figure 18.7: Mesh Settings for
the Trace Board (p. 382).
Note
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
382 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings
a. Ensure that your settings match those in Figure 18.8: Mesh control Panel (p. 383).
c. Check the mesh quality for the trace and the overall model from the Display and Quality tabs.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 383
Joule/Trace Heating
Note
Instead of accessing the Basic parameters panel, you can instead use the Problem
setup wizard to define your problem setup by double-clicking Problem setup in the
Model manager window. See 2.7. Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings of the Finned
Heat Sink tutorial for more instruction regarding the Problem setup wizard. You must
still use the same settings described in this tutorial for the Problem setup wizard.
a. Since this is a forced convection problem, ensure that the Flow and Temperature check boxes and
the Turbulent option are selected. Select Zero equation as the turbulence model.
b. Set the Number of iterations to 200 and the Convergence criteria for Energy and Joule heating
to 1e-8.
a. Input the following for Temperature in the Linear solver group box:
ii. Enter 1e-6 for both the Termination criterion and Residual reduction tolerance.
Your settings should match those in Figure 18.9: Linear Solver Settings (p. 384).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
384 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 6: Calculate a Solution
3. After your solution has converged, your residuals plot may look similar to Figure 18.10: Solution Resid-
uals (p. 386).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 385
Joule/Trace Heating
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
386 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
c. Select Show contours and click Parameters. In the Object face contours panel, select Temperature
in the Contours of drop-down list and select This object next to Calculated in the Color levels
group box. Click Apply.
d. Observe the trend of the temperature contour and how it varies from one side to other, and compare
the maximum temperature for the cases with and without trace modeling (Figure 18.11: Trace Tem-
perature Contours with Forced Convection (p. 388)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 387
Joule/Trace Heating
2. Now plot the electric potential of the same trace, Figure 18.12: Trace Electric Potential Contours with
Forced Convection (p. 389).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
388 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
b. Select Electric Potential from the Contours of drop-down list and press Apply.
• Do you observe any similarity between the temperature and the electric potential contours?
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 389
Joule/Trace Heating
• The temperature contours are closely related to the electric potential contours, which is a direct
result of Joule heating of the trace.
d. Press Done in the Object face contours and Object face panels to close the panels.
We repeat some of the best practices found in this tutorial for your convenience:
• Filter out traces too small to be thermally significant. This can reduce unnecessary meshing and compu-
tational time.
• Use the hex-dominant mesher when you are using imported trace data.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
390 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 19: Microelectronics Packages - Compact models
19.1. Introduction
This tutorial is a case study of a board design. A card supplier is making two package type changes to
an existing commercial board. The objective of the thermal simulation project is to see if the selected
new packages are likely to function without overheating. In the event of over heating, what kind of
thermal management should be recommended?
19.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have worked on Sample Session in the Icepak User’s Guide and the first
two ANSYS Icepak tutorials of this guide.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 391
Microelectronics Packages - Compact models
2. Start ANSYS Icepak, as described in Starting ANSYS Icepak in the Icepak User’s Guide.
4. In the File selection panel, select the packed project file compact-package-modeling.tzr and
click Open.
5. In the Location for the unpacked project file selection dialog, select a directory where you would like
to place the packed project file, enter a project name, such as test-1, in the New project text field
then click Unpack.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
392 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 393
Microelectronics Packages - Compact models
Note
An ounce of Copper is actually the thickness of 1 ounce/sq.ft of plane copper sheet. Using
copper density this translates to a thickness of 0.035 mm.
Create a PCB object by clicking the Create printed circuit boards button ( ). Then edit the PCB
by clicking the Edit object button ( ) while the PCB object is selected in the Model manager
window. Enter the following in the Geometry tab:
a. Go to the Properties tab. Enter the PCB thickness of 1.6 mm for Substrate thickness.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
394 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
b. Change the default unit from microns to Cu-oz/ft2 for high and low surface thickness and for internal
layer thickness under the Trace layer parameters group box.
2. Enter the material information for the PCB found in Table 19.1: Available Details for Objects in the Mod-
el (p. 393). This information can be entered for the selected PCB object as shown in Figure 19.3: PCB Edit
Form with input based on PCB information in the Table with Model Object Details above (p. 395).
Figure 19.3: PCB Edit Form with input based on PCB information in the Table with Model
Object Details above
Now, you should see the PCB object overlapping the block called PCB. There is no more need for
this block.
Note
You recreated the PCB object geometry using coordinates of the imported PCB block.
3. Right-click the block named PCB and deselect Active to deactivate the block object.
4. Verify the material properties of the heat spreaders for the TO-220 devices.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 395
Microelectronics Packages - Compact models
a. Since the default solid material happens to be Al-Extruded, all three spreaders should have come
into the model with the correct material specifications. Check this information by editing the
spreaders.
This model has four different types of objects. Based on the available information and our objectives,
we shall use different compact package modeling capabilities in ANSYS Icepak.
i. There are 9 TO-220 device blocks. Select them all at once by drawing a selection box around them
with Shift and the left mouse button (see Figure 19.4: Window Selecting Multiple Objects for
Simultaneous Edit (p. 396)). Press Shift+y to get a positive Y orientated view as in the figure.
Simultaneous selection can also be done in the Model manager window. Press the Ctrl key and
click to select several objects.
ii. You should see all TO-220 devices highlighted in the Model manager window. Note that only
TO-220 objects should be selected. If you see other objects highlighted (such as the Spreader
objects), deselect them by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking them in the Model manager
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
396 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
window. You can simultaneously edit all of the remaining objects at once by right-clicking on any
one of the selected TO-220 objects in the Model manager window.
Caution
You will not be able to edit the objects simultaneously if you still have the
spreaders selected.
B. Keep the default selection of Two resistor for the Network type.
C. In order to assign the resistance, you need to identify a reference side. This is the purpose of
the “board side" input. You want the resistance to be applied from the junction to the side in
contact with the spreader (Max Z side). You can accomplish this in two ways:
• Designate Min Z as the Board side and assign the supplier provided resistance value (2.5
C/W from Table 19.1: Available Details for Objects in the Model (p. 393)) to Rjc.
or
• Designate Max Z as the Board side and assign the supplier provided resistance value to
Rjb.
Note
Zero resistance means that there would not be any link and the resistance
values are infinite. For more information regarding the two-resistor model,
refer to Two-Resistor Model in the Icepak User’s Guide.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 397
Microelectronics Packages - Compact models
i. As you have done previously for the TO_220 objects, select all the DIP objects and simultaneously
edit them.
ii. Select default for Solid material (however, any material would work because you are not interested
in the temperature of the DIP packages).
B. Click Done.
Note
DIP is the package type for which you have the least information. So you are
left with two options:
or
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
398 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
• Perform a tentative simulation with the available information. The options are
considered along with the following facts:
– The DIPs contribute a lower heat flux than the other components in the board.
– This is an existing design in which the DIPs have been known to run well below
their specified temperature even at max power.
Internal details are unavailable for the PQFP type package. But based on the exterior details
such as lead count, foot print size, and package height information, it is possible to construct a
compact model of a typical package for screening analysis.
i. Go to the Libraries node by clicking the Library tab in the Model manager window. Right-click
Libraries and select Search packages.
Note
A package may also be created using either IC package macros or a package object.
ii. In the Search package library panel enter all known information about the package
(Table 19.1: Available Details for Objects in the Model (p. 393)) as the search criteria. Clicking the
Search button should return 1 the closest matching packages from the library. Pick the package
that is most similar in description to the 232-lead PQFP information available and select Create.
Figure 19.6: Package Search Criteria (p. 400) depicts the package search settings and results.
1
If search does not return a relevant package, click the package object icon to create a new package object. After entering the few
known values, you may enter reasonable values or leave the remaining parameters as default.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 399
Microelectronics Packages - Compact models
iii. Go back to the Project tab and edit the newly created package object. Make sure that:
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
400 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Note
CCM is a compact model based on geometric simplifications that still preserve the
original heat transfer pathways of the package. It has been demonstrated 2 that
CCM is fairly accurate and boundary condition independent. Other options under
Model type are:
• To model the package in full detail. This option is meant for package level modeling.
Using this in board or system design will create many more objects requiring
meshing and thus increase the mesh size.
iv. Select the Die/Mold tab. (The Substrate and Solder tabs show blank interface since QFP type
packages do not have soldering or substrates.) Enter 3.5 W for Total power.
v. Use all other defaults under the Die/Mold tab. Click Done to close the tab.
vi. The package created is in an arbitrary location. You may use the Align face centers button ( )
to position the base center of the created package object with that of the 232PQFP block. The
dimensions of the package should match the dimensions of the 232PQFP block (select the block
to see its dimensions):
vii. Since there is no more need for the 232PQFP block, deactivate it.
viii.There is another 232PQFP block (232PQFP.1). Create a copy of the first package object and align
it with the remaining 232PQFP block. Note that this second package is offset from the first in
only the X direction by –70 mm. Deactivate the second “232PQFP" block (232PQFP.1). The di-
mensions of the second package should be:
You have fairly comprehensive information about the PBGA type package from the supplier (see
Table 19.2: Available Information for 400 PBGA (p. 394)). Using this information you can construct
a CCM or characterize to determine Θjc and Θjb to model it as a two-resistor network model as
shown here:
2
Karimanal, K.V. and Refai-Ahmed, G., “Validation of Compact Conduction Models of BGA Under An Expanded Boundary Condition
Set", Proceedings of the ITHERM 2002, May 2002, San Diego, Ca, USA.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 401
Microelectronics Packages - Compact models
i. Select all the blocks named 400-PBGA and edit all of them simultaneously.
A. Select Network as the Block type and Two resistor as the Network type.
C. Input the estimated Θjc (1.4 C/W) and Θjb (6.75 C/W) values in the Rjc and Rjb fields respect-
ively.
ii. Edit the Cabinet. In the Properties tab, you have the option to define the boundary condition
(Wall type) for each side of the cabinet. Set the Wall type for Min x and Max x as Opening.
iii. Press Edit for the Min x side to open the Openings panel.
iv. In the Properties tab of the Openings panel, assign an X velocity of 1.0 m/s.
vi. The Max x side opening should have the default settings (free opening).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
402 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Generate a Mesh
ix. You should see the openings on the min X and max X sides of the cabinet.
a. Make sure Mesher-HD is selected as the Mesh type and Normal is selected for Mesh parameters.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 403
Microelectronics Packages - Compact models
2. (optional) Create non-conformal assemblies around each package set to reduce mesh bleeding and
consequently reduce the mesh count. As a start, use 3 mm slack values for all sides of each assembly.
Resize the assemblies if necessary. With non-conformal assemblies, you can reduce the number of elements
in the mesh significantly. Display and compare the conformal and non-conformal meshes.
2. Go to Solution settings → Basic settings panel and click Reset. Set the number of iterations to
200 in the Basic settings panel and close the panel by clicking Accept.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
404 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 6: Calculate a Solution
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 405
Microelectronics Packages - Compact models
2. Go to Solve → Run solution and select Sequential solution of flow and energy equations. Since
you have neglected gravity, there is no coupling between the flow and energy equations. Therefore,
sequential solution of the flow and energy equations is possible to speed up the convergence rate.
1. Create temperature contours of pcb.1 by clicking the Object face icon ( ), selecting Show contours,
clicking Parameters, and selecting This object for the Calculated drop-down list. Figure 19.10: Temper-
ature Contours on pcb.1 (p. 407) depicts the object face you have just created.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
406 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
• Probe temperatures values at desired locations on the object face by using the Surface probe feature
( ).
• Note the higher temperatures in the parts of the PCB under the PQFP packages.
2. Go to Report → Network block values. The text window lists all the network block temperatures.
Network junction temperatures can also be obtained from the overview report.
3. The closeness of the PBGA objects relative to each other may be a potential cause for overheating. How
much of the problem is due to the ambient temperature of the air flowing past these components?
• You can visualize the thermal boundary layer over the PBGA objects by taking an X-Y plane cut of
temperature contours over the PBGA blocks (Figure 19.11: Temperature Contour Plane Cut (Z plane
through center) (p. 408)). Note the higher temperatures in the wake region of the right-most block.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 407
Microelectronics Packages - Compact models
4. What is the cause for the relatively high temperatures of the TO-220 devices?
• Are the heat spreaders too close? If so, the air flowing between the spreaders will overheat preventing
further heat dissipation to the air. You can find out if this is the case by creating XZ cut planes of
vectors and contours that cut across the spreader blocks. In Figure 19.12: Temperature Contour Plane
Cut (Y plane through center) (p. 409), the boundary layers of the spreaders do not interfere with each
other significantly. Therefore, their arrangement relative to each other is not problematic thermally.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
408 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
5. The highest temperatures are in the 400-PBGA blocks. Effective cooling solutions can be designed by
understanding heat flow pathways.
• Generate a summary report of heat flow for the 400-PBGA blocks. By deselecting the check box under
Comb in the Define summary report panel, generate an itemization of the heat flow through each
side of the object. Figure 19.13: Summary Report for Object 400-PBGA (p. 410) shows the resulting
summary report.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 409
Microelectronics Packages - Compact models
What if:
2. The flow is in the negative X direction, and by judicious use of flow resistances, more flow is diverted
toward the PBGA objects (for the same overall flow rate)?
3. The bottom side of the PCB is not dissipating any heat as a result of lying on a domain boundary. On
the other hand, there seems to be plenty of space above the board. The main reason for the headroom
above the PCB is the height of the spreader blocks. While there is room to move up the spreader by a
little bit, more room can be gained if the spreader is longer in the X direction but shorter in its Y height.
What if both sides of the PCB are exposed to airflow by moving the PCB upward?
4. A heatsink is mounted on the PBGA blocks? Will it be possible to use a heatsink in contact with all PBGA
blocks? Are there any practical issues?
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
410 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 20: Multi-Level Meshing
20.1. Objective
The objective of this exercise is to use multi-level meshing to improve the mesh resolution and optimize
the mesh count of a model that has CAD objects. The procedure from this exercise should help you
make adequate modeling and meshing decisions during your thermal modeling projects.
20.2. Prerequisites
The trainee should be familiar with:
• Basics of meshing
• Non-conformal meshing
• Non-conformal meshing
• Multi-level meshing
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 411
Multi-Level Meshing
meshing and the uniform mesh parameters feature, you can reduce the mesh count to approximately
500,000 elements and improve mesh resolution.
Note
Multi-level meshing allows for gradually increasing resolution of fine-level features. For more
information on multi-level meshing, see Meshing Options of the Icepak User’s Guide.
• Generate the mesh without modifying the model. You will see a mesh count of about 650,000 cells.
Note
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
412 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step-by-Step Approach
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 413
Multi-Level Meshing
• In the Multi-level tab, select Allow multi-level meshing and set Max Levels to 2.
• Keep the default selection of Proximity size function and Curvature size function.
Note
For more information on various multi-level meshing options, see Global Refinement for
a Hex-Dominant Mesh of the Icepak User’s Guide.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
414 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Modification 2: Multi-Level Mesh of the Sheetmetal_hs_assy.1
• In the Multi-level tab, toggle Allow multi-level meshing, keep Max Levels as 2 and set Buffer layers
to 1.
• Keep the default selection of Proximity size function and Curvature size function.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 415
Multi-Level Meshing
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
416 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Generate a Mesh
• Observe the decrease in the number of mesh elements in the Mesh control panel.
• Display a cut plane of the mesh to examine the multi-level meshing around the fan guide.
Figure 20.3: Meshing Levels of the Fan Guide Objects (p. 418) shows a cut plane of the mesh through
the fan guide. Observe the various levels of meshing starting from level 0 and refining to level 2 near
the object interfaces.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 417
Multi-Level Meshing
• Display the mesh of the plate object guide_sweep-0_1.1 and the block object SheetMetal_HS.
Figure 20.4: Surface Mesh of guide_sweep-0_1.1 (p. 419) shows the surface mesh on the flow guide
for the plate object guide_sweep-0_1.1. Fine mesh resolution in some regions is necessary for
a body fitted mesh. This can be clearly seen in the figure.
Figure 20.5: Surface Mesh of SheetMetal_HS (p. 420) shows the mesh on and around the sheet metal
heatsink. It can be seen that the mesh resolution is fine in the fin region and coarser as we move
away from the heatsink.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
418 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Generate a Mesh
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 419
Multi-Level Meshing
20.9. Conclusion
Using multi-level meshing, we were able to improve the mesh resolution and instantly transition to
coarser meshes thus reducing the overall mesh count. Hence, this approach significantly reduces run
time while enhancing the accuracy of the simulation.
In addition, we repeat here some of the tips found in this tutorial for your convenience:
– Set the level of each object by right-clicking it in the Model manager window. Manually specified objects
can have more levels than the maximum number of levels specified.
– Select multiple objects that require the same number of levels to set them simultaneously in the
Model manager window.
– Specify the max element size in each of the principal directions to achieve the desired resolution.
→ For example, if you require a resolution of 1 mm and are using 2 levels, then your max element size
should be:
=
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
420 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Conclusion
• Avoid applying multi-level meshing to the entire model by using non-conformal assemblies and then ac-
tivating multi-level meshing in their individual Assemblies object edit panel (under the Meshing tab).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 421
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
422 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 21: Characterizing a BGA-package by Utilizing ECAD Files
21.1. Introduction
In Tutorials Trace Layer Import for Printed Circuit Boards and Joule/Trace Heating you learned how to
import trace layouts for a PCB. In this tutorial, you will learn how to import trace layouts on a BGA
package substrate by using TCB files.
21.2. Prerequisites
You should be familiar with the menu structure in ANSYS Icepak and should have solved or read the
tutorial Finned Heat Sink of this guide. Many basic steps found in the introductory tutorials will not be
mentioned here.
2. Click New in the Welcome to Icepak panel to start a new ANSYS Icepak project.
3. Specify a name for your project, such as BGA-package, and then click Create.
Edit → Preferences
a. In the Preferences panel, click Units, under the Defaults node. In the Category box, scroll down
and select Length, and under Units, select mm.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 423
Characterizing a BGA-package by Utilizing ECAD Files
b. Click Set as default, Set all to defaults, and then This project.
b. In the Packages panel, click the Dimensions tab and select ASCII TCB from the Import ECAD file
drop-down list.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
424 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Note
d. Keep the settings for the layers and vias as they are and click Accept in the Board layer and via in-
formation panel.
f. Click Done.
Note
If the Objects outside panel is displayed, click the Resize Cabinet button.
g. Click the Cabinet in the object tree and click the Autoscale button located in the edit window in
the lower right corner of the main menu.
Note
h. If the graphics window does not already display the traces by color, right-click the package object in
the object tree, choose Traces → Color by trace to display the traces.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 425
Characterizing a BGA-package by Utilizing ECAD Files
As can be seen in Figure 21.2: Display of Traces (p. 426), the wirebonds are lumped into polygonal
plates by ANSYS Icepak.
i. Change the cabinet zS to -1.2 mm. If the Objects outside panel appears, click Move so that the
package is fully inside the cabinet.
j. Create a PCB object and input the following in the Geometry tab:
Note
If the Objects outside panel appears again, select Allow out to ignore the error. You
will fix the cabinet size later.
k. In the Properties tab, set the substrate thickness as 0.8 mm and then enter the following percent
coverage of copper for the layers:
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
426 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
l. Click Update. Note that ANSYS Icepak updates the thermal conductivity information, plane and normal,
for the PCB object.
n. Create a wall object with zero thickness in the Z direction. Name it Bottom. Enter the same dimensions
for the wall object as you did for the PCB object created previously as shown in Figure 21.4: Geometry
Window for Object Bottom (p. 427).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 427
Characterizing a BGA-package by Utilizing ECAD Files
o. Edit the wall object and insulate it by keeping the heat flux as 0.0 in the Properties tab.
p. Make a copy of the wall and translate it in the Z direction by 2.95 mm and rename the new wall to
Top.
• Select the object Cabinet in the Model manager window and then click Autoscale in the geometry
window so that all of the other objects are inside the cabinet.
We would like to specify the heat transfer coefficient on the top surface using the well-known
correlation in the literature, (Incropera et. al 1). In order to do that, you can follow the procedure
in Figure 21.5: Specifying the Heat Transfer Coefficient on the Top Wall (p. 428).
Figure 21.5: Specifying the Heat Transfer Coefficient on the Top Wall
1
Frank Incropera and David DeWitt, Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1981.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
428 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Generate a Mesh
2. In the Mesh control panel (Figure 21.6: Mesh control Panel (p. 429)), enter 0.5 mm, 0.5 mm, and 0.14
mm for the Max element size for X, Y, and Z, respectively. Change the Minimum gap values to 0.05
mm, 0.05 mm, and 0.01 mm for X, Y, and Z, respectively. In the Misc tab, deselect Allow minimum
gap changes and click Change value and mesh in the Minimum separation panels that appear.
Note
3. Click Generate.
4. Click Close to close the panel once you have created the mesh.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 429
Characterizing a BGA-package by Utilizing ECAD Files
Note
Instead of accessing the Basic parameters panel, you can instead use the Problem setup
wizard to define your problem setup by double-clicking Problem setup in the Model
manager window. See 2.7. Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings of the Finned Heat Sink
tutorial for more instruction regarding the Problem setup wizard. You must still use the
same settings described in this tutorial for the Problem setup wizard.
b. Select Off in the Radiation group box and then click Accept to close the panel.
Note
Neglecting flow and radiation means that this is a pure conduction problem.
a. Change the Number of iterations to 25 and the Convergence criteria for Energy to 1e-15.
Note
The absence of flow equations means the problem requires very few iterations to
converge. Since ANSYS Icepak is only solving for the energy equation, you require a
very stringent convergence criterion for the energy residual.
a. Input the following for Temperature in the Linear solver group box:
ii. Enter 1e-6 for both the Termination criterion and Residual reduction tolerance.
Note
These settings aid in convergence when ANSYS Icepak solves only the energy equation.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
430 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
a. Go to Post → Object face and choose the wirebonds under the package object.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 431
Characterizing a BGA-package by Utilizing ECAD Files
d. Click Done in the Object face contours and Object face panels to close the panels and view the
temperature contours.
a. Choose source_DIE1 under the node for package.1 for the first object and the wall object Top for
the second object.
Maximum die and maximum top wall temperatures are determined to be 131.2 and 127.7°C, respect-
ively. Note that these values may differ depending on your machine. The top wall represents the
case for the package. Therefore, junction-to-case resistance for this package is determined as:
−
=
(21.1)
Where
is the die power (0.5 W in this case). Substituting these values, we can calculate the junction-
to-case resistance like so:
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
432 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Summary
−
= = ° (21.2)
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 433
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
434 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 22: Zero Slack with Non-Conformal Meshing
22.1. Introduction
This tutorial compares the mesh of a non-conformal assembly with and without slack values around a
heat sink, package, and board. You will solve a model using zero slack values to determine the temper-
ature distribution.
In this tutorial you will learn how to use zero slack values properly with a non-conformal mesh in ANSYS
Icepak.
22.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have reviewed Sample Session and the tutorials Finned Heat Sink and
RF Amplifier of this guide.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 435
Zero Slack with Non-Conformal Meshing
The objective of this exercise is to illustrate the advantage of using zero slack values for non-conformal
assemblies. The model will be constructed using the default metric unit system.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
436 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Import Traces
2. Start ANSYS Icepak, as described in Starting ANSYS Icepak in the Icepak User’s Guide.
When ANSYS Icepak starts, the Welcome to Icepak panel opens automatically.
4. In the File selection panel, select the packed project file ZeroSlack_Tut.tzr and click Open.
The Location for the unpacked project file selection dialog appears.
5. In the Location for the unpacked project file selection dialog, select a directory where you would like
to place the unpacked project file, enter a project name, such as zeroslack, in the New project text
field, and then click Unpack.
Edit → Preferences
1. In the Preferences panel, click Units under the Defaults node. In the Category box, scroll down and
select Length, and under Units, make sure mm has an asterisk next to it. If there is no asterisk next to
mm:
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 437
Zero Slack with Non-Conformal Meshing
2. In the Geometry tab, select ASCII TCB from the Import ECAD file drop-down list.
Important
You need to unzip BOARD_OUTLINE_1.zip or extract the TCB file within it before you
can import the TCB into ANSYS Icepak. You can find the ZIP archive in the installation
directory at ICEPAK_ROOT/tutorials/ZeroSlack/BOARD_OUTLINE_1.
3. In the Trace file panel, select BOARD_OUTLINE.tcb. Deselect the Resize Block option because the
PCB was imported using an IDF file, so the dimensions are already correct. This process may take a few
minutes depending on the speed of your computer.
Note
The Resize Block option is necessary when the board size is not known or an IDF file is
not available.
4. Once the import is complete, you can edit the layer information in the Board layer and via information
panel. Enter the layer thicknesses as shown in the table below.
5. By default, layers are lumped for each sub-grid. Therefore, the Model layers separately option is disabled
and will need to be selected.
a. Click Accept to close the Board layer and via information panel.
b. Then click Edit next to Trace layers and vias in the Blocks panel to re-open the Board layer and
via information panel.
c. The Model layers separately option is now available. Select the option.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
438 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Add Slack Values
Note
• You can view the traces in four different ways: Single color, Color by trace, Color by layer,
or Color by net.
• The meshing plates are placed at the location of the different layers; they are used to ensure
the mesh resolution is high enough at each layer.
Note
Non-conformal assemblies reduce mesh bleeding and lower the overall mesh count. This is
particularly useful for regions where a coarser mesh is sufficient.
1. Set the slack values for the heat sink assembly as shown in the figure below.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 439
Zero Slack with Non-Conformal Meshing
3. Make sure that the Min elements in gap is 2, the Min elements on edge is 1, and the Max size ratio
is 3.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
440 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Zero Slack
a. Go to the Local tab and click Edit next to Object params. You will see the following requested values
in the Per-object meshing parameters panel (scroll down to see the inside ratios):
6. Take note of the mesh count and view a cut plane of the mesh from the Display tab.
Note
The package is not well resolved and it is divided between the heatsink and board assem-
blies. Moreover, the mesh bleeds into the package’s edges significantly because of the
nonzero slack values of the Heatsink assembly on the Min Z and Max Z faces. This prevents
you from creating a separately meshed assembly for the package because non-conformal
assemblies cannot intersect with each other in ANSYS Icepak. You can verify this by
changing the view to the positive X orientation.
Non-conformal assemblies with zero slack help in resolving specific objects without extending the mesh
to the rest of the cabinet. Also, zero slack non-conformal assemblies help to avoid intersections with
other non-conformal assemblies. In this tutorial, the use of zero slack non-conformal assemblies allows
us to have a separate non-conformal assembly for the package and to accurately resolve the mesh.
Note
Currently, zero slack assemblies are unable to participate in radiation when a surface coincides
with the assembly interface.
1. Change the slack values for the heat sink assembly as shown in the figure below.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 441
Zero Slack with Non-Conformal Meshing
2. In addition, select the Mesh separately option in the assemblies Package and Board. Do not change
any other values in these assemblies. These other assemblies will have default slack values of zero. Fig-
ure 22.2: Package and Heatsink Assemblies (p. 443) shows the Package and Heatsink assemblies adjacent
to each other without intersection due to the zero slack values in the Z direction for both assemblies.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
442 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Physical and Numerical Settings
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 443
Zero Slack with Non-Conformal Meshing
2. Note
Instead of accessing the Basic parameters panel, you can instead use the Problem
setup wizard to define your problem setup by double-clicking Problem setup in the
Model manager window. See 2.7. Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings of the Finned
Heat Sink tutorial for more instruction regarding the Problem setup wizard. You must
still use the same settings described in this tutorial for the Problem setup wizard.
Go to Problem setup → Basic parameters and make sure the Flow regime is Turbulent
and the turbulence model is Zero equation in the General setup tab. Also, input a small initial
(global) X velocity of –1.5 m/s in Transient setup tab. Click Accept to accept the changes made
and exit the Basic parameters panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
444 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 13: Summary
Nonetheless, there are certain limitations of zero slack non-conformal assemblies that you must keep
in mind:
• Surfaces of objects that are coplanar with a zero slack non-conformal interface cannot participate in radi-
ation.
• Zero slack assembly interfaces cannot touch 2D objects, such as fans, openings, grilles, conducting thin
plates, and so on.
• Zero slack assembly interfaces cannot touch the sides of blocks with individual side specifications.
Always check that objects coplanar with a zero slack interface are correctly meshed.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 445
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
446 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 23: ANSYS Icepak - ANSYS Workbench Integration Tutorial
23.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates how to create and solve an ANSYS Icepak analysis in ANSYS Workbench. You
will model a geometry using both ANSYS DesignModeler and Icepak. You will then create a non-con-
formal mesh for the complex shapes. The project will also include postprocessing the results in ANSYS
CFD-Post and performing a static structural analysis in ANSYS Mechanical.
23.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have little experience with ANSYS Workbench and so each step will be
explicitly described.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 447
ANSYS Icepak - ANSYS Workbench Integration Tutorial
Note
When ANSYS Workbench starts, the Toolbox and Project Schematic are displayed.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
448 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Note
A green check mark in the Geometry cell indicates you have imported the geometry
successfully.
2. Double-click the Geometry (A2) cell to open DesignModeler as you need to edit the geometry first before
exporting into ANSYS Icepak.
a. Go to the Units menu and then select Meter as the desired length unit.
c. Edit the geometry in DesignModeler using the Electronics option in the Tools menu. Select Simplify
and choose the appropriate simplification level and select bodies.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 449
ANSYS Icepak - ANSYS Workbench Integration Tutorial
ii. Keep the Simplification Type as Level 2. Your settings should resemble those in Figure 23.2: Details
of Simplify1 (p. 450).
Refer to the DesignModeler documentation for more detailed information on using the Electronics
options.
Note
The Electronics menu is shown only if the DesignModeler option Enable Electronics
Options is selected.
3. Drag and drop an Icepak template into the Project Schematic on top of the Geometry cell (A2) to
transfer the geometry into ANSYS Icepak.
4. Right-click the Setup cell (B2) and select Edit to launch ANSYS Icepak.
a. The CAD model appears in the graphics display window and has been converted into ANSYS Icepak
objects. Click the isometric toolbar icon ( ) to display the isometric view of the model.
b. Rename the objects in the edit panel of each of the objects by going to the Info tab then changing
the Name field. Enter the specifications in Properties tab. Table 23.1: Object Properties (p. 451) shows
these specifications.
Note
You can rename the objects in the edit panel of each of the objects by going to the
Info tab then changing the Name field. To open the object edit panel, right-click the
object and select Edit. After editing the object, you can press Update to save any
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
450 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
changes and click a different object in the Model manager window to go to that
object without closing the panel.
X = 20, Y = 0.4, Z = 20
Note
Edit the Solid material by selecting a material in the drop down list. To create a
Custom material, select Create material in the drop-down list and click the Properties
tab in the Materials panel. Enter the specifications above.
Model → Cabinet
i. In the Cabinet panel, click the Geometry tab. Under Location, enter the following coordinates:
Table 23.2: Coordinates for the Cabinet (Specify by: Start / end)
xS = -0.19 m xE = 0.03 m
yS = 0 m yE = 0.02848 m
zS = -0.11 m zE = 0 m
ii. Edit the cabinet properties to specify Min x and Max x sides as openings.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 451
ANSYS Icepak - ANSYS Workbench Integration Tutorial
A. In the Properties tab of the Cabinet object panel, select Opening from the drop-down list
under Wall type for Min x and Max x.
B. Select Edit to display the opening for the Max x object panel.
C. In the Properties tab, specify the X Velocity to be -2 m/s. Click Done in the Openings and
Cabinet panels to apply the changes and close the panels.
Note
To add objects to an assembly, select one or more objects in the Model manager window
and drag them into the desired assembly node.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
452 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Generate a Mesh
2. Go to the CPU_assembly edit panel and click the Meshing tab. Select the Mesh separately option and
enter the following slack values. Click Done to close the panel when finished.
3. Specify the overall mesh controls as shown in the Mesh control panel below.
Note
For more information on how to refine a mesh locally, refer to Refining the Mesh Locally
in the Icepak User’s Guide.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 453
ANSYS Icepak - ANSYS Workbench Integration Tutorial
Note
The Mesh units and Minimum gap values are in mm, and Set uniform mesh params
is selected in the Global tab.
Click Generate to create the mesh. You can check the mesh by going to the Display and Quality
tabs in the Mesh control panel. Click Close when you are done.
Note
Instead of accessing the Basic parameters panel, you can instead use the Problem setup
wizard to define your problem setup by double-clicking Problem setup in the Model
manager window. See Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings of the Finned Heat Sink tu-
torial for more instruction regarding the Problem setup wizard. You must still use the same
settings described in this tutorial for the Problem setup wizard.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
454 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 6: Calculate a Solution
a. In the General setup tab, make sure that both Flow (velocity/pressure) and Temperature are selec-
ted.
b. Select Turbulent and Zero equation for the Flow regime and select Off in the Radiation group
box to neglect radiation modeling.
Note
You can click the save icon ( ) in the File commands toolbar.
2. Specify the name ice_wb for your project and click Save.
3. ANSYS Workbench will close ANSYS Icepak to save the model, you will need to launch ANSYS Icepak
again to continue.
ANSYS Icepak begins to calculate a solution for the model and a separate window opens where the
solver prints the numerical values of the residuals. ANSYS Icepak also opens the Solution residuals
graphics display and control window, where it displays the convergence history for the calculation.
Note that the actual values of the residuals may differ slightly on different machines, so your plot
may not look exactly the same as the figure below.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 455
ANSYS Icepak - ANSYS Workbench Integration Tutorial
4. Once the solution converges, click Done in the Solution residuals window to close it.
Note
The postprocessing of results can be done within ANSYS Icepak; however, you can also ex-
amine results in ANSYS CFD-Post. This section will describe how to transfer information to
ANSYS CFD-Post and use its postprocessing options, so you may close ANSYS Icepak.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
456 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results with CFD-Post
1. After calculating a solution in ANSYS Icepak, a green check mark will be displayed in the Icepak Solution
cell in the Project Schematic. The green check mark indicates that all data is up to date. Select Results
under the Component Systems node in the Toolbox. Drag the Results component system on top of
the Icepak Solution cell (B3) to transfer the data.
2. Double-click the C2 Results cell to launch ANSYS CFD-Post. The model should appear in the display
window.
a. Go to Insert → Contour or click the Contour button to create a contour. Retain the name Con-
tour 1 and click OK.
i. Keep the default selection of All Domains in the Domains drop-down list.
ii. Click the ... button next to Locations to display the Location Selector panel. Highlight all objects
containing "CPU", "PCB", or "HEAT_SINK" in the name as shown in Figure 23.4: Location Selector
Panel (p. 458). Click OK to close the panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 457
ANSYS Icepak - ANSYS Workbench Integration Tutorial
Note
You can select multiple objects by pressing and holding either Shift or Ctrl while
clicking the objects.
iv. Select Apply to display the contour map (Figure 23.5: Contour 1 (p. 459)).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
458 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results with CFD-Post
a. Go to Insert → Streamline or click the Streamline button to create the streamline. Retain the
name Streamline 1 and then click OK.
ii. Keep the default selection of All Domains in the Domains drop-down list.
iii. Select cabinet_default_side_maxx minx from the Start From drop-down list.
iv. Keep the default selection of Velocity in the Variable drop-down list.
v. Keep all other defaults and click Apply to display the streamline.
c. You can also animate the streamline. To animate the streamline, go to Tools → Animation or click
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 459
ANSYS Icepak - ANSYS Workbench Integration Tutorial
• In the Animation panel that appears, select Streamline 1 and then click the play button ( ).
Click the stop button ( ) then the Close button when finished.
5. When you are done examining the results, close ANSYS CFD-Post and return to ANSYS Workbench.
1. Select Static Structural from the Toolbox. Drag and drop this cell on top of the Icepak Solution cell
(B3).
2. Click the Geometry cell (A2) and drag and drop it on top of the Static Structural Geometry cell (D3).
You have now shared the geometry with the Static Structural component module as well as the Icepak
module from earlier.
3. Right-click the Setup cell (D5) and then click Update. Allow ANSYS Workbench to complete the update.
5. Expand the Imported Load (Solution) node in the Outline window then click the Imported Body
Temperature object.
6. Under Details of “Imported Body Temperature”, ensure that the Scoping Method is Geometry Selec-
tion.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
460 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Summary
a. Click the Box Select button . Hold down the Ctrl key and drag a box around the
entire model to select it.
b. Click the cell to the right of Geometry and then click Apply. You should have nine bodies now selec-
ted.
8. Click Solve.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 461
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
462 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 24: Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
24.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates the use of ANSYS CFD-Post for post-processing results from ANSYS Icepak
analyses.
24.2. Prerequisites
• Familiarity with the ANSYS Workbench interface
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 463
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
Figure 24.2: Quick Reference - Mouse Button Mapping (default) in CFD Post:
To adjust or view the mouse mapping options, go to Edit → Options, then Viewer Setup → Mouse
Mapping in ANSYS CFD-Post.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
464 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 1: Create a New Project
b. Drag an ANSYS Icepak component module from the Toolbox and drop it on the Project Schematic
window as shown in Figure 24.4: Creating an ANSYS Icepak Component (p. 465).
c. Rename the ANSYS Icepak component module as Parametric Setup as shown in Figure 24.5: Re-
naming the ANSYS Icepak Component Module (p. 465). To rename the title, double-click the title
Icepak or click the down arrow ( ) and select the Rename option from the drop-down list.
d. As shown in Figure 24.6: Linking the Results (ANSYS CFD-Post) Component to the ANSYS Icepak
Component (p. 466) and Figure 24.7: Final Project Schematic (p. 466), drag and drop a Results (ANSYS
CFD-Post) component module onto the Solution cell of the Parametric Setup to link the ANSYS
Icepak analysis to ANSYS CFD-Post. Rename the Results component module to CFD Post.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 465
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
Figure 24.6: Linking the Results (ANSYS CFD-Post) Component to the ANSYS Icepak
Component
e. Save the project while in the ANSYS Workbench interface. Name the project as ice-cfdpost.
a. Right-click the ANSYS Icepak Setup cell and import the packed ANSYS Icepak project file ice-cfd-
post.tzr located in the project directory.
Note
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
466 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Calculate a Solution
b. The ANSYS Icepak interface will launch with the imported project for modeling and analysis.
2. Go to Solve → Run solution → Results and verify that Create heat flux vectors in CFD Post is selected
and then click Dismiss.
a. In the Design variables tab, review the parametric setup. Note the variable values for fanxC and
grille_xS.
b. In the Trials tab, note that two of the four trials will be considered for CFD analysis.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 467
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
2. ANSYS Icepak will run two trials and automatically write out the results for post-processing in ANSYS
CFD-Post at the end of each trial.
a. On the project schematic, double-click the Results cell to launch the ANSYS CFD-Post interface.
b. ANSYS CFD-Post automatically reads the most recent solution set (trial 004).
2. Create a Surface Group for the board and all the components.
c. Go to the Details view located on the lower left hand side of the screen (see Figure 24.1: Quick Ref-
erence - CFD Post Interface (p. 463)).
d. In the Geometry tab, click next to Locations to open the Location Selector panel.
i. As shown in Figure 24.10: Selection for the BoardANDComponents Surface Group (p. 469), hold
down Shift and the left mouse button to select all of the objects excluding the objects in the
Cabinet node. You may need to press the Ctrl key also to select the objects.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
468 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
ii. Click OK to close the Location Selector panel and add the surfaces.
a. Go to Insert → Location → Surface Group and name the group CabinetSurfaces. Click Apply
in the Details view. CabinetSurfaces should now appear in the Outline tree view.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 469
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
Figure 24.11: Listing of Surface Groups under User Locations and Plots
b. As before, open the Location Selector panel, but this time select only the objects in the Cabinet
node (Figure 24.12: Selection for the CabinetSurfaces Surface Group (p. 470)). Click OK.
c. In the Render tab, apply the settings as shown in Figure 24.13: Rendering Details for the CabinetSur-
faces Surface Group (p. 471) and click Apply.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
470 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
d. Deselect the object BoardANDComponents from the User Locations and Plots node in the Outline
tree view.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 471
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
e. Note that these newly create Surface Groups are listed under User Locations and Plots in the Outline
tree view.
iii. Ensure that the unit for Temperature has been set to C.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
472 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
iv. Click Apply and then OK to set the units and close the panel.
Note
The object TemperatureContours is listed under the User Locations and Plots
node in the Outline tree view.
c. For the contour TemperatureContours, update the settings for the Geometry tab of the Details
view as shown in Figure 24.16: Geometry Settings for TemperatureContours (p. 474) and click Apply.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 473
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
a. Double-click Default Legend View 1 listed under the User Locations and Plots node (in the Outline)
to access the corresponding Details view.
b. Verify that your settings in the Definitions and the Appearance tabs match those shown in Fig-
ure 24.17: Settings for Default Legend View 1 (p. 475) and then click Apply.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
474 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 475
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
b. Go to Insert → Vector and create a new Vector object named HeatFluxVectors and click OK.
c. Modify the Geometry tab of the Details view as shown in Figure 24.19: Geometry Settings for Heat-
FluxVectors (p. 476).
d. Go to the Symbol tab and input 2.5 for the Symbol Size. Click Apply and then observe the updated
model.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
476 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
7. Plot Thermal Chokepoint, displaying regions of high heat flux on the Surface Group BoardANDCom-
ponents.
b. Go to Insert → Contour and create a new Contour object named Chokepoint and click OK.
c. Open the Location Selector panel and select only the ALPHA_MAIN_PCB objects (Figure 24.21: Se-
lection for Thermal Chokepoint (p. 478)). Click OK to close the Location Selector panel and add the
surfaces.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 477
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
d. Modify the Geometry tab of the Details view as shown in Figure 24.22: Geometry Settings for
Chokepoint (p. 479) and click Apply.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
478 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 479
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
a. Deselect Chokepoint and select TemperatureContours in the User Locations and Plots node.
b. Go to Insert → Streamline and create a new Streamline object named StreamlinesFan and
click OK to access the Details view panel.
c. Modify the Geometry tab as shown in Figure 24.24: Geometry Settings for StreamlinesFan (p. 481)
and click Apply.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
480 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
d. Modify the Color tab as shown in Figure 24.25: Color Settings for StreamlinesFans (p. 481) and click
Apply.
e. Modify the Symbol tab as shown in Figure 24.26: Symbol Settings for StreamlinesFan (p. 482) and
click Apply.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 481
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
482 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
b. Click the button to insert a new frame called KeyframeNo1 as shown in Figure 24.28: Keyframe
Animation Panel (p. 483).
c. Right-click the background next to the model in the 3D viewer and select the View From +Y option
under Predefined Camera.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 483
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
e. Select the Animate Camera option on the Keyframe Animation panel (you may need to activate
the display of the lower half of the Animation panel using the drop-down arrow ).
h. Click the Options button on the Animation panel to access the Animation Options panel.
i. Set the Animation Speed to Slower from the drop-down menu by a factor of 20 and click OK.
j. Replay the animation and note that the animation is less choppy compared to the original one.
l. Deselect the TemperatureContours and StreamlinesFan objects under User Locations and
Plots.
10. Create a Plane object displaying temperature contours and velocity vectors.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
484 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
b. Modify the Details view for PlaneCut as shown in Figure 24.31: Details for PlaneCut (p. 485) and
click Apply.
c. Deactivate the display of the plane by deselecting PlaneCut and activate the contour display by
selecting TemperatureContours under User Locations and Plots.
d. Double-click TemperatureContours or right-click Edit to access the Details view. Update the
details as shown in Figure 24.32: Details for TemperatureContours (p. 485) and click Apply.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 485
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
e. Go to the Details view for the PlaneCut (do not activate the display of the PlaneCut) and make
the following modifications:
ii. Use the scroll bar to change the Z location for PlaneCut.
f. The plane cut can also be traversed across the domain using the animation tools in CFD-Post.
i. Go to Tools → Animation and select Quick Animation (default) and highlight the PlaneCut
object.
ii. Using the scroll bar, adjust the number of frames for the animation as shown in Figure 24.34: Quick
Animation Settings (p. 487) and click the button.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
486 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
iii. The animation can be viewed on the screen or can be written out to an animation file by checking
the Save Movie option.
g. Deactivate the display of the contours by deselecting the TemperatureContours object under
User Locations and Plots.
i. Modify the Details view for VelVectors to set the Locations to PlaneCut and click Apply.
j. As before, use the Details view for the PlaneCut to manually traverse the plane displaying the
vectors across the domain.
k. Deactivate the display of the vectors by deselecting Velvectors under User Locations and Plots.
b. Modify the Details view for HotSpots to create an isosurface for 27[C] (Variable: Temperature,
Value: 27°C).
c. Similarly, modify the Details to create an isosurface for 3 m/s (Variable: Velocity, Value: 3 m/s).
d. Deactivate the display of the isosurface by deselecting HotSpots under User Locations and Plots.
b. Modify the Details view for IsoVolume as shown in Figure 24.35: Details of IsoVolume (p. 488) and
click Apply.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 487
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
c. Deactivate the display of the volume by deselecting IsoVolume under User Locations and Plots.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
488 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
b. Modify the Details view for ForChart as shown in Figure 24.37: Details for Line ForChart (p. 489).
and click Apply.
c. Deactivate the display of the line by deselecting ForChart under User Locations and Plots.
ii. General tab: Set the Title to Temperature Variation along Z axis.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 489
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
Note
The chart TemperatureVariation is added under the Report node of the Outline
tree.
14. Create an Expression and Variable that can be used for postprocessing.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
490 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
a. Switch to the Expressions tab (located next to the Outline tab) and review the list of available ex-
pressions.
i. Right-click in the white space and click New to create a new expression named VelocityRatio.
iii. Right-click the white space in the Definition tab to access the Functions, Expressions, Variables,
Locations and Constants which will be used to create the expression VelocityRatio.
iv. Create the expression as shown in Figure 24.39: Expression for VelocityRatio (p. 492) and click Apply.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 491
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
Note
b. Switch to the Variables tab and review the list of Derived, Geometric, Solution, and User Defined
variables.
i. Right-click the white space and click New to create a new variable named VelRatio.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
492 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Comparison Study
iii. Select Expression for the Method and selectVelocityRatio for the Expression.
Note
c. You can now plot Contours, Isosurfaces, Vectors, Charts, and so on using the new variable VelRatio.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 493
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
a. Go to File → Close CFD Post to close the existing ANSYS CFD-Post session.
b. In the ANSYS Workbench project schematic, right-click the Solution cell of the parametric setup
component to transfer the solution data to a new Results component, as shown in Figure 24.40: Cre-
ation of New Results Component (p. 494).
d. Double-click the Results cell of Comparison Study to launch a new ANSYS CFD-Post session.
Note
As before, ANSYS CFD-Post automatically reads in the most recent solution set (trial
004).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
494 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Comparison Study
2. As shown in Figure 24.41: The Load Results Panel (p. 495), go to File → Load Results to load an addi-
tional solution set. Navigate to the ~ice-cfdpost_files/dp0/IPK/Icepak/IcepakProj folder
to pick trial001.cfd.dat as the second solution set for the comparison study.
Note
The root directory ~ice-cfdpost_files refers to the project folder in which you
have saved the ANSYS Workbench project for this tutorial.
a. Synchronize the camera and the visibility in the displayed views by selecting the corresponding features
from the Shortcuts Toolbar (located above the models in 3D viewer displays):
b. Rotate, Zoom, or Pan one of the displays and confirm that the other display follows suit.
c. Using the Shortcuts Toolbar, modify the display to a landscape view (switch from to )
4. As before, go to Insert → Location → Surface Group and create a Surface Group named BoardAnd-
Components.
Important
The Surface Group in this ANSYS CFD-Post session should include the board and com-
ponent surfaces from both solution sets. Use the Location Selector to select all the objects
excluding the cabinet objects for each list. The easiest way to do this is to select all the
objects from both groups using Shift and the left mouse button, then deselecting the
cabinet objects from both groups using Ctrl and the left mouse button. Click Apply to
create the surface group.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 495
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
6. As before, go to Insert → Contour and create a new contour object named TemperatureContours
and set its Locations to the BoardAndComponents Surface Group. Set Variable to Temperature
and click Apply.
7. Update the display of the Default Legend View (each display will need to be updated individually) as
before.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
496 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Comparison Study
8. Go to Insert → Streamline and create a Streamline object named StreamlinesFans and edit the
Details as below:
a. Geometry tab: Select fan1_minx from both solution sets for Start From and set # of Points to 50.
Tip
Click the button ... next to Start From to select both fan1_minx objects more easily.
b. Color tab: Set Mode to Variable and select Temperature for Variable.
c. Symbol tab: Select Show Symbols and Show Streams. Set the Interval to 0.005 s.
d. Click Apply.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 497
Postprocessing Using ANSYS CFD-Post
e. Perform a detailed comparison study using the various features (Isosurface, Plane, Animation etc.)
discussed earlier in this tutorial.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
498 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 25: High Density Datacenter Cooling
25.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates how to model a datacenter using ANSYS Icepak.
• Use macros to create computer room air conditioning units (CRACs), server cabinets, power distribution
units (PDUs), and perforated floor tiles in the datacenter.
• Create contours, particle traces, iso-surfaces to better understand the airflow patterns and temperature
stratification within the datacenter space.
25.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you are familiar with the menu structure in ANSYS Icepak and that you have
solved or read the tutorial Finned Heat Sink of this guide. Some steps will not be shown explicitly.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 499
High Density Datacenter Cooling
2. Click New in the Welcome to Icepak panel to start a new ANSYS Icepak project.
3. Specify a name for your project such as datacenter and click Create.
ANSYS Icepak creates a default cabinet with the dimensions 1 m × 1 m × 1 m, and displays the
cabinet in the graphics window.
Note
You can rotate the cabinet around a central point using the left mouse button, or you
can translate it to any point on the screen using the middle mouse button. You can zoom
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
500 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Set Preferences
into and out from the cabinet using the right mouse button. To restore the cabinet to
its default orientation, select Home position in the Orient menu.
a. Select Float for the Color legend data format and enter 2 under Numerical display precision.
a. Turn off Decoration for all object types and update line Width to 2 for blocks, fans, openings, plates,
resistances and grilles.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 501
High Density Datacenter Cooling
a. Select the Cabinet in the Model tree and specify the following in the object geometry window:
c. Click the Isometric view button ( ) to show a scaled-to-fit isometric view of the cabinet.
Note
The walls of the cabinet are adiabatic and do not participate in radiation by default.
Radiation will not be considered for this analysis.
ANSYS Icepak creates a free rectangular plate in the x-y plane in the center of the cabinet. You
need to change the orientation and size of the plate and its location within the cabinet.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
502 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Build the Model
b. Enter the dimensions as shown below in Figure 25.4: The CRAC Panel (p. 504).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 503
High Density Datacenter Cooling
Note
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
504 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Build the Model
4. Set the per-object meshing parameters for the fans crac_intake and crac_exhaust.
a. Open the Mesh control panel by clicking the Generate mesh button ( ).
i. In the Per-object meshing parameters panel, Ctrl+left click crac_exhaust and crac_intake
to select both objects.
iii. Check the X count and Z count options and specify a Requested value of 4 for both options.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 505
High Density Datacenter Cooling
a. Select all the CRAC objects by Shift+left clicking cracunit and then crac_exhaust in the Model
manager window.
b. Right click one of the selected objects and go to Create and then Group.
c. In the Create group panel, enter CRACs in the Name for new group text field.
c. In the Copy group panel, check Group name and enter CRACs.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
506 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Build the Model
e. Press Apply and Done to copy the CRAC unit and close the panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 507
High Density Datacenter Cooling
b. Input the dimensions as show below in Figure 25.9: The Rack (Front to Rear) Panel (p. 509).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
508 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Build the Model
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 509
High Density Datacenter Cooling
Note
The volumetric flow rate input for the recirculation opening is converted by ANSYS
Icepak to a mass flow rate input to the computational stage of the analysis. For this
conversion, ANSYS Icepak uses the density specified for Air in the materials panel as
shown below.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
510 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Build the Model
a. Select all the server rack objects by Shift + left clicking rack and then rack-opns.10 in the
Model manager window.
b. Right click one of the selected objects and go to Create and then Group.
c. In the Create group panel, enter RACKs in the Name for new group text field.
b. In the Copy group panel, check Group name and enter RACKs.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 511
High Density Datacenter Cooling
f. Press Apply and Done to copy the row of server racks and close the panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
512 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Build the Model
c. Input the dimensions as show below in Figure 25.13: The Rack (Front to Rear) Panel (p. 514).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 513
High Density Datacenter Cooling
11. Create a new group for the high density server racks.
a. Select all the high density server rack objects by Shift+left clicking hdrack and then hdrack-
opns.10 in the Model manager window.
b. Right click one of the selected objects and go to Create and then Group.
c. In the Create group panel, enter HDRACKs in the Name for new group text field.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
514 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Build the Model
b. In the Copy group panel, check Group name and enter HDRACKs.
f. Press Apply and Done to copy the row of high density server racks and close the panel.
Figure 25.14: Two Rows of High Density Server Racks in the Graphics Window
c. Enter the dimensions as show below in Figure 25.15: Tile Panel (p. 516).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 515
High Density Datacenter Cooling
d. Choose +Z.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
516 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Build the Model
14. Set the per-object meshing parameters for all the resistance objects.
a. Open the Mesh control panel by clicking the Generate mesh button ( ).
b. In the Local tab, press Edit next to the Object params option.
i. In the Per-object meshing parameters panel, Shift+left click tile and then tile.10 to select
all the resistance objects.
iii. Check the X count and Z count options and specify a Requested value of 4 for both options.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 517
High Density Datacenter Cooling
a. Select all the tile objects by Shift+left clicking tile and then tile_open_bottom.10 in the
Model manager window.
b. Right click one of the selected objects and go to Create and then Group.
c. In the Create group panel, enter TILEs in the Name for new group text field.
b. In the Copy group panel, check Group name and enter TILEs.
d. Press Apply and Done to copy the row of perforated tiles and close the panel.
e. Right click TILEs in the Groups node again and select Copy.
f. In the Copy group panel, check Group name and enter TILEs.
h. Press Apply and Done to copy both rows of perforated tiles and close the panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
518 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Build the Model
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 519
High Density Datacenter Cooling
b. Double click the grille.1 object in the Model manager window to open the Grille panel.
c. In the Info tab, enter ceiling-return under Name and enter CEILING-RETURN under Groups.
d. In the Geometry tab, set the Plane to X-Z and enter the following dimensions:
c. In the Copy group panel, check Group name and enter CEILING-RETURN.
e. Press Apply and Done to copy the return grille and close the panel.
f. Right click CEILING-RETURN in the Groups node again and select Copy.
g. In the Copy group panel, check Group name and enter CEILING-RETURN.
i. Press Apply and Done to copy the row of return grilles and close the panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
520 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Build the Model
b. Double click the newly created object to open the Grille panel.
c. In the Info tab, enter ceiling-return-crac1 under Name and select CEILING-RETURN from
the Groups drop-down list.
d. In the Geometry tab, set the Plane to X-Z and enter the following dimensions:
g. Right click the vent ceiling-return-crac1 from the Model tree and select Copy.
h. In the Copy group panel, check Group name and enter CEILING-RETURN.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 521
High Density Datacenter Cooling
j. Press Apply and Done to copy the return grille and close the panel.
21. Set the per-object meshing parameters for the return grilles.
a. Open the Mesh control panel by clicking the Generate mesh button ( ).
b. In the Local tab, press Edit next to the Object params option.
i. In the Per-object meshing parameters panel, Shift+left click ceiling-return and then
ceiling-return.3 to select all the return grilles.
iii. Check the X count and Z count options and specify a Requested value of 4 for both options.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
522 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Build the Model
b. Enter the dimensions as shown below in Figure 25.22: The PDU Panel (p. 524).
e. Set the Percent open area on top and the Percent open area on bottom to 0.25.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 523
High Density Datacenter Cooling
23. Set the per-object meshing parameters for the grilles pdu_vent_in and pdu_vent_out.
a. Open the Mesh control panel by clicking the Generate mesh button ( ).
i. In the Per-object meshing parameters panel, Ctrl+left click pdu_vent_in and pdu_vent_out
to select both objects.
iii. Check the X count and Z count options and specify a Requested value of 4 for both options.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
524 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Build the Model
a. Select all the PDU objects by Shift+left clicking pdu_unit and then pdu_part4 in the Model
manager window.
b. Right click one of the selected objects and go to Create and then Group.
c. In the Create group panel, enter PDUs in the Name for new group text field.
b. In the Copy group panel, check Group name and enter PDUs.
c. Check Translate and set the X offset to 14 ft and the Z offset to 28 ft.
d. Press Apply and Done to copy the PDU and close the panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 525
High Density Datacenter Cooling
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
526 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 3: Build the Model
ii. In the Copy group panel, check Group name and enter CABLETRAYS.
iv. Press Apply and Done to copy the cabletray and close the panel.
v. Right click CABLETRAYS in the Groups node again and select Copy.
vi. In the Copy group panel, check Group name and enter CABLETRAYS.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 527
High Density Datacenter Cooling
viii.Press Apply and Done to copy the cabletrays and close the panel.
2. In the Mesh control panel, enter 2 ft, 0.5 ft, and 1 ft for the Max element size for x, y, and z, respectively.
Change the Minimum gap values to 1 in, 0.36 in, and 1 in for x, y and z, respectively.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
528 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Create Monitor Points
Note
3. Click Generate.
4. Use the Display and Quality tabs to view the mesh and check the mesh quality.
5. Click Close to close the panel once you have finished viewing the mesh.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 529
High Density Datacenter Cooling
ii. Select Turbulent and Zero equation for the Flow regime.
i. Select Mica-Typical from the Insulators section of the Default solid drop-down list.
ii. Select Paint-non-metallic from the Paint section of the Default surface drop-down list.
i. Set the initial Y velocity to be 0.5 ft/s (a non-zero initial velocity is recommended for problems
involving natural convection).
i. Select the Ideal gas law (recommended for problems involving significant temperature differences).
iii. Select Enable for Species and keep default values in the Species definitions panel.
iv. Press Accept to apply the settings and close the panel.
i. Select the crac-intake fans by Ctrl+left clicking crac_intake and then crac_intake.1 in
the Model manager window.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
530 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Calculate a Solution
ii. Right click and select Edit from the context menu.
iii. Select Species from the Options tab located within the Fan’s [*multiple*] Properties tab and
click Edit.
iv. In the Species concentrations panel, select RH from the concentrations list and enter 50.
a. Change the Number of iterations to 1000 and the Convergence criteria for Energy to 1e-6.
b. Set the Under-relaxation to 0.2 for Momentum and to 0.1 for Body forces.
ANSYS Icepak begins to calculate a solution for the model, and a separate window opens where the
solver prints the numerical values of the residuals. ANSYS Icepak also opens the Solution residuals
graphics display and control window, where it displays the convergence history for the calculation.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 531
High Density Datacenter Cooling
Upon completion of the calculation, your residual and monitor plots will look something like Fig-
ure 25.27: Solution Residuals (p. 532) and Figure 25.28: Temperature Point Monitors (p. 533). You can
zoom in the residual plot by using the left mouse.
Note
The actual values of the residuals may differ slightly on different machines, so your plots
may not look exactly the same as Figure 25.27: Solution Residuals (p. 532) and Fig-
ure 25.28: Temperature Point Monitors (p. 533).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
532 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Examine the Results
4. Click Done in the Solution residuals and Temperature Point monitors windows to close them.
c. In the Object drop-down list, expand the Groups node and Ctrl+left click CRACs, HDRACKs, PDUs,
and RACKs, and click Accept.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 533
High Density Datacenter Cooling
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
534 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Examine the Results
a. Right click surface-temp-contours under the Post-processing node in the Model manager
window, and make the object face inactive by unchecking Active in the context menu.
d. Check Show contours and click Create to view a plane cut of the temperature contours.
e. Check the Loop mode option and click Animate to display a loop of the plane cut traversing from
the min z to the max z side of the datacenter.
f. Click Interrupt on the progress bar to return to the Plane cut panel.
g. Repeat the above procedure for plane cuts in the Y-Z and X-Z planes by changing the Set position
to X plane through center and Y plane through center respectively.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 535
High Density Datacenter Cooling
a. Right click plane-temp-contours in the Model manager window and make the plane cut inactive
by unchecking Active in the context menu.
e. Check Show contours and click Create to view the isosurface of 90°F.
i. In the Animation group box, enter 90 for Start, 80 for End, and 10 for Steps.
iii. Click Interrupt on the progress bar to return to the Isosurface panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
536 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Examine the Results
a. Right click iso-temp in the Model manager window and make the isosurface inactive by unchecking
Active in the context menu.
d. In the Object drop-down list, expand the Groups node and Ctrl+left click CEILING-RETURN,
HDRACKs, PDUs, RACKs, and TILEs, and click Accept.
h. Check Loop mode under Animation and set the Steps to 50.
Note
ANSYS Icepak will take a few moments to generate the airflow patterns.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 537
High Density Datacenter Cooling
k. View the animated airflow patterns from various angles from the Orient menu.
m. Click Done in the Object face particles and Object face panels to close them.
n. Right click airflow in the Model manager window and make the particle traces inactive by un-
checking Active in the context menu.
5. Report the volumetric flow rate distribution at the perforated floor tiles.
c. In the Objects drop-down list, expand the Groups node and select TILEs, and click Accept.
d. Select Volume flow from the Value drop-down list and deselect Comb.
f. In the Objects drop-down list select crac_exhaust and crac_exhaust.1, and click Accept.
g. Select Relative humidity from the Value drop-down list and deselect Comb.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
538 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Examine the Results
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 539
High Density Datacenter Cooling
25.13. Step 10: Additional Exercise: Visualize and analyze the results in
ANSYS CFD-Post
In addition to using the postprocessing tools contained within ANSYS Icepak, you can also postprocess
using the advanced tools in ANSYS CFD-Post through ANSYS Workbench. See Postprocessing Using
ANSYS CFD-Post for details on how to use the features in ANSYS CFD-Post.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
540 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 26: Design Modeler - Electronics
26.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates how to use ANSYS DesignModeler to convert a model for analysis in ANSYS
Icepak.
• Use the Slice, Opening, Fan, and Simplify options in ANSYS DesignModeler.
26.2. Prerequisites
• Familiarity with the ANSYS Workbench interface
Figure 26.1: Comparison of the Geometry in ANSYS DesignModeler and ANSYS Icepak
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 541
Design Modeler - Electronics
b. Drag a Geometry (ANSYS DesignModeler) component module from the Toolbox and drop it on the
Project Schematic window as shown in Figure 26.2: Creating a Geometry Component Module (p. 542).
c. Rename the Geometry component module to STEP Import and DME to Icepak Transla-
tion. To rename the title, double-click the title Geometry, or click the down arrow ( ) and select
the Rename option from the drop-down list.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
542 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
a. Ensure that you have Millimeter selected as the desired length unit.
2. Go to File → Import External Geometry File and select DME.stp and press Open.
Note
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 543
Design Modeler - Electronics
1. Go to Tools → Options
Note
• You can also access the option from the Create menu.
• You can also access the and Electronics options from the Tools menu.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
544 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Edit the Model for ANSYS Icepak
a. Go to Electronics → Show Ice Bodies. Only bodies with simple geometries recognized as ANSYS
Icepak objects will be visible.
Note
We will not have to make modifications to export these bodies into ANSYS Icepak.
b. Go to Electronics → Show CAD Bodies. Only bodies with complex geometries not recognized as
ANSYS Icepak native objects will be visible.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 545
Design Modeler - Electronics
Note
These are the bodies we will have to modify in order to export these bodies into
ANSYS Icepak.
a. In the Tree Outline, right-click Housing and select Hide All Other Bodies.
Note
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
546 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Edit the Model for ANSYS Icepak
e. Click the field to the right of Target Face and select the one of faces at the base of the fins, as shown
in Figure 26.7: FinsSlice1 Face Selection (p. 547) and click Apply.
Note
If you cannot select the face, try using the Model Faces selection filter ( ).
g. Click the field to the right of Bodies and select the Housing body from the Tree Outline.
i. Verify that the Details view for FinsSlice1 resembles Figure 26.8: Details View of FinsSlice1 (p. 547).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 547
Design Modeler - Electronics
a. Use the procedure described above on the other set of fins and name the second Slice FinsSlice2.
Note
The Housing should now appear in several parts in the Tree Outline. When selecting
Hide All Other Bodies, select all of the Housing nodes first.
Note
Make sure that the Bodies selection is the larger section of the housing containing
the fins as shown in Figure 26.9: FinsSlice2 Bodies Selection (p. 548).
Note
a. Press +Y on the Triad (the axes) to get a clear view of the fins.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
548 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Edit the Model for ANSYS Icepak
d. Drag the bounding box around one set of fins, and rotate the model to make sure that all the fins
are selected as shown in Figure 26.10: Selecting a Row of Fins (p. 549) (you should have 13 bodies
selected).
e. Right-click anywhere in the Model View and select Form New Part.
f. In the Details view, set the Part feature name to Fins1 and press Enter on the keyboard.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 549
Design Modeler - Electronics
g. Repeat steps a to f for the other set of fins, except name the part Fins2.
5. Simplify the Housing body between the parts Fins1 and Fins2.
Important
Note that this Housing body is located outside the parts Fins1 and Fins2.
b. Go to Electronics → Simplify.
c. In the Details view, rename the feature HousingSimplify and then press Enter.
d. In the Simplification Type field, select Level 1 from the drop-down list.
a. Show all bodies again by right-clicking one of the objects in the Tree Outline and clicking Show All
Bodies.
b. Use the Single Select option now along with the Faces selection filter.
c. Go to the +Y view and select the face as shown in Figure 26.11: FanOpenings Face Selection (p. 551).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
550 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Edit the Model for ANSYS Icepak
d. Go to the –Y view.
e. While holding down the Ctrl key, select the face as shown in Figure 26.12: BackOpenings Face Selec-
tion (p. 551).
f. Go to Electronics → Opening.
g. In the Details view, click Apply in the Faces field. You should have 2 to the right of Faces.
7. Create a Fan.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 551
Design Modeler - Electronics
a. Right-click the Fan body in the Tree Outline and select Hide All Other Bodies.
Note
b. Go to Electronics → Fan.
d. Click the field to the right of Body To Extract Fan Data, select the entire fan body and click Apply.
e. Click the field to the right of Hub/Casing Faces and select the faces as shown in Figure 26.13: Hub/Cas-
ing Faces Selection (p. 552).
Note
You can select multiple faces by simultaneously holding down Ctrl and clicking the
objects.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
552 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Edit the Model for ANSYS Icepak
Note
Although it may seem like there was no change, this step creates a fan object in ANSYS
Icepak. To confirm this, you can go to Electronics → Show Ice Bodies and check if
the fan is present.
i. In the Tree Outline, select the Front-Panel part and then simultaneous press Ctrl and click
the Fan object.
ii. Right-click the Fan object and select Form New Part.
a. Show all bodies again by right-clicking one of the objects in the Tree Outline and clicking Show All
Bodies
b. Go to Electronics → Simplify.
e. Click the field to the right of Select Bodies and select the front and the rear panels of the Housing
as shown in Figure 26.14: HousingFrontBack Bodies Selection (p. 554).
Tip
Again, simultaneously press Ctrl and click each panel in order to make both selections.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 553
Design Modeler - Electronics
a. Select all the Housing, Fin, Panel, Opening, and Fan objects from the bottom of the Tree Outline
by holding down Shift and clicking the objects of interest as shown in Figure 26.15: Selection of
Housings, Fins, Panels, Openings, and Fans (p. 555).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
554 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Edit the Model for ANSYS Icepak
Note
Selecting Fins1, Fins2, Front-Panel, Rear-Panel includes the selection of all the
components inside of those nodes.
b. Right-click the selected objects and select Hide Body to view just the internal components.
c. Go to Electronics → Simplify.
f. Click the field to the right of Select Bodies and select the PWB and all the HS_AF0 and T0220_Case
objects.
Tip
You can either follow the steps immediately below to select the objects from the
Graphics window, or you can select them directly from the Tree Outline.
i. Go to the +Z view.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 555
Design Modeler - Electronics
iii. Hold down Ctrl and select the objects as shown in Figure 26.16: PWB, HS_AF0, and T0220_Case
Bodies Selection (p. 556).
g. Click Apply. The Select Bodies field should now show 13 bodies selected.
h. Click .
a. Change the Selection Mode to Box Select and make sure the selection filter is set to Bodies.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
556 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Edit the Model for ANSYS Icepak
b. Select a package object as shown in Figure 26.17: Package Object Selection (p. 557). There should be
6 bodies selected.
c. Right-click the model and select Form New Part. All the bodies will be added to the part.
e. Repeat steps a to e for the rest of the packages, except naming the parts T0220_Case2,
T0220_Case3, etc.
a. Go to Electronics → Simplify.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 557
Design Modeler - Electronics
d. Click the field to the right of Select Bodies and select the bodies as shown in Figure 26.18: Coil
Bodies Selection (p. 558). There should be 4 bodies selected.
b. Make the same selection as in the simplify operation. Notice that there are now 8 bodies instead of
4.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
558 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Edit the Model for ANSYS Icepak
a. Go to Electronics → Simplify.
d. Click the field to the right of Select Bodies and select the bodies as shown in Figure 26.19: Capacitors
Bodies Selection (p. 559). There should be 3 bodies.
e. Click Apply.
g. Click .
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 559
Design Modeler - Electronics
b. Make the same selection as the simplify operation. There should still be 3 selected bodies.
b. Follow the same steps as before to create a part called BGAHS for the Heat Sink and Components
for the Components:
16. Right-click a body in the Tree Outline and select Show All Bodies. Your model should look like Fig-
ure 26.21: Final Model in ANSYS DesignModeler (p. 561) and your Tree Outline should look like Fig-
ure 26.22: Final Tree Outline (p. 562).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
560 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Edit the Model for ANSYS Icepak
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 561
Design Modeler - Electronics
Note
Some of your parts and bodies may be in a different order than what is shown in Fig-
ure 26.22: Final Tree Outline (p. 562).
17. Check if all the bodies have been converted to ANSYS Icepak objects.
b. Confirm that the view contains no bodies. This means all the bodies have been recognized by ANSYS
Icepak.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
562 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Opening the Model in ANSYS Icepak
2. In ANSYS Workbench, drag an ANSYS Icepak component to cell A2 to create an ANSYS Icepak component
module.
3. Double-click the Setup cell (B2) to open the model in ANSYS Icepak.
4. In the Model manager window, right-click the Model node and select Expand all to view the geometry
inside the assemblies.
5. Notice that the bodies have been successfully transferred into ANSYS Icepak.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 563
Design Modeler - Electronics
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
564 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 27: CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
27.1. Introduction
This tutorial describes the procedure for setting up and running a CFD analysis for the ANSYS Icepak
geometry that was created as a part of the Design Modeler - Electronics tutorial located in the Icepak
Tutorial Guide.
27.2. Prerequisites
You should have the following before starting this tutorial:
• Familiarity with the Design Modeler - Electronics tutorial which is located in the Icepak Tutorial Guide
• In the file selection panel, select the packed project file tut26-Icepak.tzr and click Open.
Note
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 565
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
• In the location for the unpacked project file selection dialog, select a location where you would like to
create the new Icepak project and click Unpack.
• Note that the faces of the cabinet align with the outermost boundaries of the rest of the model.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
566 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Create a Support for the Box and Resize Cabinet
• From the Model manager window, double-click block.1 to open the edit panel.
• Using the Info tab, rename the block as Support and click Update.
• In the Properties tab, set the block type to Hollow as shown in the below figure:
• In the Geometry tab, switch to Start / length, update the coordinates for the block as shown below and
click Done.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 567
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
Note
• A warning message (see below) comes up indicating that the support block is outside the cabinet.
• Click Resize cabinet to allow the cabinet to resize to include the support block within its extents.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
568 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Create a Support for the Box and Resize Cabinet
• From the Model manager window, double-click Cabinet and open the Cabinet edit panel.
• In the Geometry tab, modify the cabinet dimensions as shown below and click Update.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 569
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
• Using the Properties tab, set the Wall type for the cabinet sides as shown below and click Done.
Note
This setup will be used for a forced convection and a natural convection (fan failure) based
analysis.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
570 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Set Up the Model for Non-conformal Meshing
• Go to the Orient menu, select Scale to Fit to resize the view in the graphics window.
• Keeping the Shift key pressed, left click and drag the mouse to draw a window around the box as shown
below. Release the left click or Shift button to select the geometry fully enclosed within the box.
• Right-click the selected items (in the Model manager window) and select Create assembly from the
menu items as shown below.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 571
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
• In the Model manager window, expand assembly.1 by clicking the assembly node
( ).
• Note in the Model manager window that the Fan is listed outside the Front-Panel-Fan assembly
node.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
572 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Set Up the Model for Non-conformal Meshing
• Select the Fan from the Model manager window and drag it to the Front-Panel-Fan assembly as
shown below.
• On the Model manager window, double-click assembly.1 to open the edit panel for assembly.1.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 573
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
• Go to the Meshing tab and then select Mesh separately. Modify the Slack settings and Max element
size inputs as shown below and then click Done.
Figure 27.13: Slack Settings and Max Element Size Inputs for assembly.1
• Similarly, modify the slack values for the other assemblies as shown in Table 27.1: Slack Settings for the
Assemblies (p. 574).
Note
As you have done for assembly.1, select Mesh separately in the Meshing tab for each
of the assemblies in the table before entering the required inputs.
Tip
To facilitate the specifications, click Update in the Assemblies panel after each specification
and then click the next assembly object in the Model manager window. Doing this, you
do not have to close and re-open the Assemblies panel repeatedly.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
574 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Generate the Mesh
T0220_Case5 1 1 1 1 1 1
T0220_Case6 1 1 1 1 1 1
Coil 1 1 1 1 4.175 1
Components 1 1 1 1 4.175 1
Capacitors 1 1 2.271 1 4.175 2
BGAHS 1 1 1 1 4.175 1
Fins1 1 0 1 1 1 1
Fins2 0 1 1 1 1 1
Note
You have not meshed the Housing assembly separately. Furthermore, you have set a
few slack values to 0 for some assemblies. These are to avoid any assembly-assembly in-
tersections, which ANSYS Icepak does not allow.
• Change the Max element size and Minimum gap settings to those shown in Figure 27.14: Mesh Paramet-
ers (p. 576).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 575
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
• Click Generate.... The resulting mesh size should be between 500,000 and 600,000 cells. Observe in the
Message window that no mesh exists for the DIE_AF0 objects.
• Right-click the Model node from the Model manager window and select Sort → Meshing Priority.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
576 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Generate the Mesh
• From the Model manager window, expand the node for the assembly TO220_Case3. Note that DIE_AF0
is at the top of the list indicating that it has the least meshing priority.
• While holding down the Shift key, select TO220_Case_0 and TO220_Case_1 from the Model manager
window. Drag and drop these above DIE_AF0 as shown in Figure 27.16: Modifying the Meshing Prior-
ity (p. 577). This automatically changes the respective meshing priority settings such that DIE_AF0 has a
higher meshing priority than the TO220_Case blocks do.
Note
For more information on meshing priority, see Controlling the Meshing Order for Objects
of the Icepak User’s Guide.
• Similarly, update the meshing priorities of the other DIE_AF0 blocks for all the TO220_Case assemblies.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 577
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
• Go to the Model menu and click Generate mesh. Confirm that the Message window does not display
warnings for the meshing of the DIE_AF0 objects as it has earlier.
Note
From the messages printed in the Message window, remeshing is limited to the
TO220_Case assemblies only.
• Use the Display and Quality tabs to visualize mesh refinement and assess mesh quality.
– You do not need to change the settings for blocks not included in this list.
Tip
For objects that require similar material and power specifications, you can edit them sim-
ultaneously to speed up the process. From the Model manager window, select all of the
objects requiring the same material and power specifications, such as the DIE_AF0 objects,
while holding down the Ctrl key. Right-click one of the selected objects and select Edit
to open the shared object edit panel. You can now select the material and total power for
all of the selected objects simultaneously. Click Done after you change the settings.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
578 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Physical and Numerical Settings
Note
Orient the fan in the negative Y direction by selecting Negative in the Flow direction
group box.
Figure 27.17: Fan Curve and Swirl Inputs for the Fan Object
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 579
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
Problem Setup
Note
Instead of accessing the Basic parameters panel, you can instead use the Problem setup
wizard to define your problem setup by double-clicking Problem setup in the Model
manager window. See 2.7. Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings of the Finned Heat Sink
tutorial for more instruction regarding the Problem setup wizard. You must still use the
same settings described in this tutorial for the Problem setup wizard.
• Modify the General setup tab for the Basic parameters (under the Problem setup node) as shown below.
• Set the options for discrete ordinates radiation model as below and click Accept.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
580 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Physical and Numerical Settings
• Go to the Defaults tab and update the Ambient conditions as shown below.
• Go to the Advanced tab, enable Solar loading and update the options for solar loading as shown below.
Click Accept.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 581
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
Solver Setup
• Go to the Solve menu and click Settings → Basic. Increase the Number of iterations to 500 and click
Accept.
• Retain the defaults for the Parallel and the Advanced settings.
• Create a monitor point at the centroid of the BGA. There are two ways to do so:
Method 1:
– Drag and drop the BGA block from the BGAHS assembly node in the Model manager window to the
Points node as shown below.
– Double-click the newly created monitor point and accept the default settings.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
582 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Physical and Numerical Settings
Figure 27.22: Creating a Point Monitor (Temperature) for the BGA Block - Method 1
Method 2:
– From the Model manager window, as shown below, right-click the BGA block and click Add to Clip-
board.
– Right-click the Points node (see below) and select Paste from Clipboard.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 583
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
Figure 27.23: Creating a Point Monitor (Temperature) for the BGA Block - Method 2
• Similarly, create monitor points for the opening objects Rear-Panel_18 and Rear-Panel_4, found
in the Rear-Panel assembly node. Modify the corresponding monitor point panels to enable velocity
and temperature monitoring during the solution process by selecting both Temperature and Velocity
check boxes for each of the rear panel monitor points.
Figure 27.24: Point Monitors (Temperature and Velocity) for the Openings Rear_Panel_18 and
Rear_Panel_4
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
584 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Calculate a Solution
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 585
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
• Go to the Orient menu and click Orient Negative Z and then click Zoom in in the Orient menu to zoom-
in on the graphical display on the box.
• As shown below, keeping the Shift key pressed, click and drag to draw a window that includes the PWB
and all the components on the board.
– The selection will also include the support block and some of the Housing blocks (cylinder blocks at
the base of the housing).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
586 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Examine the Results
• Right-click the selection on the Model manager window and choose Create → Object Face(s) →
Combined to create contours of temperature, the default variable, on the faces of the selected objects.
• Review the contours display (Figure 27.28: Display Contours of Temperature on Selected Objects (p. 588)).
– Note that the hot spots are located on the capacitors and the components.
– The max Y (west) side of the support block is directly exposed to solar radiation. This is confirmed by
the results. This side is ‘warmer’ than the other sides of the support block.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 587
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
• Right-click face.1 from the Post-processing node (in the Model manager window) and then deselect
Active to deactivate face.1.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
588 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Examine the Results
• Go to the Post menu and click Postprocessing units and set the units for Length to mm.
• In the Plane cut panel, select Point and normal for Set position. Change the coordinates of the point
and the normal vector direction according to Figure 27.30: Plane cut Panel Settings for cut.1 (p. 590). Click
Create.
• Check Enable clipping and enter the extents for clipping as shown below (Figure 27.30: Plane cut Panel
Settings for cut.1 (p. 590)) and click Update.
Tip
You can also snap the extents of the clipping zone from the graphics window.
• Use the scroll bar on the Plane cut panel or click the Animate button to traverse the plane cut across
the box.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 589
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
• Change the point and normal settings, in the Plane location group box, to visualize the contours in dif-
ferent orientations.
• Click Parameters (adjacent to Show contours) to change the variable, color level settings, and so on.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
590 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Examine the Results
• Go to the Orient menu and select Orient Negative Z and then click Zoom in in the Orient menu to
zoom in on the graphical display on the box.
• In the Plane cut panel for cut.1, turn off the display of contours by deselecting Show contours. Enable
the display of vectors by selecting Show vectors.
• Update the point and normal settings for the plane cut as below:
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 591
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
• Click Parameters (adjacent to Show Vectors), set the Display options to Uniform (10000), select the
Project to plane option and click Apply then Update.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
592 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Examine the Results
• Use the scroll bar on the Plane cut panel and/or the Animate button to traverse the plane cut across the
box.
• Update the point and normal settings to visualize the vectors in different orientations.
• Right-click cut.1 from the Post-processing node and deselect Active to deactivate cut.1.
• Expand the Inactive node on the Model manager window, right-click face.1 and click Active to display
face.1 again.
• In the Object face panel (for face.2), using the drop-down menu select the Fan as the object.
• Update the Parameters panel for the particle traces as below and click Apply.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 593
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
• Use the Animate button to visualize a dynamic 3D representation of the air flow beginning from the fan
and exiting out of the openings on the rear panel.
– Adjust the steps input to modify the number of frames included in the animation.
• Go to the Post menu and select Power and temperature values to identify (and display) the objects
which fail for specified maximum temperature criteria.
• Assume that the maximum temperature rating for the components in this setup is 85°C.
• In the Power and temperature limit setup panel, set the Default temperature limit to 85 C and click
All to default.
• Click Show too hot to report (in the message window) and display (on the graphics window) the objects
that fail this criterion.
– The graphical display will update for standard shape Icepak objects only. CAD objects will not be
highlighted in the graphics window but will be listed in the message window instead.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
594 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Additional Exercises
• From the Model manager window, double-click the object Fan to open its edit panel.
• In the Properties tab, go to the Options sub-tab and check the Failed option.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 595
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
• Go to the Solve menu and select Settings → Advanced and update the under-relaxation settings for
Pressure and Momentum to 0.7 and 0.3 respectively.
• Go to the Solve menu and click Run solution, enter a unique Solution ID and click Start solution.
Note
The ID icepakcfd-tut2600 should not be used for the Solution ID as it has already
been used for the forced convection, steady-state simulation setup.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
596 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Setup for Transient Analysis – Forced Convection Mode
Note
This exercise considers a transient period of 24 hours for CFD analysis and hence will be a
highly intensive undertaking from a computational standpoint. For the sake of understanding,
you may choose to run the transient solution for a shorter time period.
• Go to the Post menu and select Load solution ID, select icepakcfd-tut2600 and click Okay.
• Go to the Problem setup menu and click Basic parameters → Transient setup and set the Time variation
to Transient.
• Set the Start time to 0 s and the End time to 86400 s (24 hours).
• Click Edit parameters for Transient, set the Time step to 60 s and the Solution save interval to 30.
– Based on this setting, the solver will write out the results every 1800 seconds (30 minutes) during the
solution process.
• Select the Transient option for Temperature and click Edit to open the Transient temperature panel.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 597
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
• Select the Piecewise linear type for specifying the time dependant variation of Ambient temperature.
• Click the Text editor button and enter the Time (s) vs. Ambient temperature (°C) inputs as shown in
Figure 27.39: Time Dependant Variation for Ambient Temperature (p. 598).
• Click Accept, Done, and Accept to close the Curve specification, Transient temperature and Basic
parameters panels respectively.
• Go to the Solve menu and click Run solution, enter a unique Solution ID.
• As shown below, set the Type to Restart and select the ID for the forced convection, steady-state simu-
lation (icepakcfd-tut2600) with the Full data option.
– Having an established flow field from the steady state analysis as a starting point will aid convergence
during the transient simulation.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
598 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Setup for Transient Analysis – Forced Convection Mode
Figure 27.40: Use of Steady State Simulation as the Starting Point for the Transient Simulation
– Use the Post menu and click Transient settings to march Forward/Backward in time (by Timesteps
or by increments of time) to get a time based variation for postprocessing objects such as Plane cut,
Object face and Isosurface. The marching can be done manually using the Forward/Backward buttons
(see below) or using the Animate option.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 599
CFD Modeling and Analysis of an Avionics Box
• Use the Post menu and click History plot to create a Time vs Variable value plot for a specified point
location within the computational domain.
• Refer to the Transient Simulation tutorial located in the Icepak Tutorial Guide for more information on
set-up and postprocessing of transient simulations using ANSYS Icepak.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
600 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 28: Translation of MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native
Geometry Using ANSYS DesignModeler
28.1. Introduction
This tutorial will help familiarize the user with the ANSYS Workbench (WB) and the ANSYS DesignModeler
(DM) interfaces. This tutorial uses a heat sink geometry to illustrate the various options that are available
with the simplify feature of the ANSYS DesignModeler - Electronics utility.
28.2. Prerequisites
• Familiarity with integration of ANSYS Icepak into ANSYS Workbench
• Model Description
• WB Project Schematic
• DesignModeler
• Summary of Simplification
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 601
Translation of MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS DesignModel-
er
unimportant features at the beginning of the project can reduce model setup time and unnecessarily
fine meshing.
• You can more easily observe the model features than in the full, detailed CAD model.
• You can readily identify the features in the part that must be held constant and the portions where they
have freedom to conduct parametric trials or design of experiment studies to improve the thermal and
flow design.
Hence, we shall work with the defeatured CAD part shown in Figure 28.2: Defeatured customized heat
sink (p. 602)
Note
If you plan to perform a subsequent thermal stress analysis using the temperature data from
Icepak results, you should retain the features that affect the stress analysis rather than sim-
plify them.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
602 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
ANSYS Workbench Project Schematic
• Drag a Geometry component module from the Toolbox and drop it into the Project Schematic window
as shown in Figure 28.3: Create the Geometry Component (p. 603) below.
• Rename the Geometry component module to STEP Import. To rename the title, double-click the title
Geometry or click the left mouse button on the down arrow and select the Rename option from the drop-
down menu (highlighted in Figure 28.4: Rename the Geometry Component (p. 604) below).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 603
Translation of MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS DesignModel-
er
Figure 28.4: Rename the Geometry Component
• Next, as shown in Figure 28.5: Create the Icepak Component (p. 604), select the Icepak component module
from the toolbox and drop it on cell A2 of the geometry component to establish the link between Geometry
(ANSYS DesignModeler) and ANSYS Icepak.
• This completes the schematic representation of the project workflow. The updated Project Schematic is
shown in Figure 28.6: Updated Project Schematic (p. 605) below.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
604 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
CAD Model Import
28.6. DesignModeler
• In the Project Schematic, double-click cell A2 (Geometry) to open DM.
• Go to Tools → Options.
• In the Options panel, click the Toolbars sub-node under the DesignModeler node.
Note
Tip
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 605
Translation of MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS DesignModel-
er
Figure 28.7: Import Operation
• Rotate the model and observe the various geometric features in the imported CAD body.
Note
Generating the model is necessary to implement the last operation performed on the
model. The Graphics window displays the changes.
• Note the updated status of the individual cells (A2 and B2) on the Workbench Project Schematic.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
606 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
ANSYS DesignModeler- Electronics
choices available in the DM Electronics utility. In addition to the simplification of CAD parts, you will
work with other DM tools that will be helpful in capturing the design intent in the Icepak model.
Level 2 • Similar to Level 1, except that the resulting block shapes are polygonal ex-
trusions wherever applicable.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 607
Translation of MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS DesignModel-
er
Figure 28.9: Accessing DesignModeler Electronics
• Go to Electronics → Show Ice bodies. The Graphics window will go blank. Now, go to Electronics →
Show CAD bodies. The Graphics window will show the heat sink geometry.
Note
Regular Icepak shapes (rectangular prisms, cylinders, uniform polygons) are recognized as
valid Icepak bodies automatically. The CAD bodies need to be converted to valid Icepak
bodies using the Electronics utility.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
608 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Simplify - Level 0
• From the shortcuts toolbar, change the geometry selection filter to Bodies.
• Select the heat sink body from either the Tree Outline or from the Graphics window (click the heat sink
geometry).
• Go to Electronics → Simplify.
• Note that Simplify1 shows up in the Tree Outline and the Details view is populated with the
simplify form. Go to the Details view.
• Go to the Simplify input field and then add the prefix L0_ to the existing name so that the feature is
named L0_Simplify1. Press Enter.
• A single block (corresponding to extents of the Heat Sink geometry) should appear in the Graphics window.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 609
Translation of MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS DesignModel-
er
Figure 28.11: Simplification Type: Level 0
Steps in Workbench
• Go to the Workbench Project Schematic.
• Change the title below the Icepak module to Icepak-Simplify-Level0. To do so, double-click the
title or select the Rename option using the drop-down menu.
Steps in Icepak
• Observe that the Icepak model contains one Icepak block, the default object type for the DM Electronics
utility.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
610 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Simplify - Level 0
Steps in Workbench
• Go back to the Workbench Project Schematic. Select the link from the STEP Import module to the
Icepak-Simplify-Level0 module. Press the Delete key on the keyboard to delete the link and then
click OK to ignore the warning message that appears.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 611
Translation of MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS DesignModel-
er
28.11. Slice Tool in DM
• Go to DM. In the Tree Outline, right-click the L0_Simplify1 feature and click Suppress. This will return
you to the original heat sink CAD geometry.
• Change the Graphics window orientation to the positive-Z orientation by clicking the +Z arrow in the
global coordinate axes, as in Figure 28.15: Heat sink (p. 612) (a).
• Observe that the fins on the left side are polygonal profiles extruded through the heat sink length.
• Now rotate the model so that the top is just visible, as in Figure 28.15: Heat sink (p. 612) (b). Notice that
the right side contains rectangular pockets. To capture the heat sink features accurately, we will model
the left half with polygonal fit, and the right half with cuboidal fit.
• Re-orient the model to expose the heat sink bottom as in Figure 28.16: Selection of Slice Surface (p. 613).
• Select the median face (highlighted in green on the Graphics window) as in Figure 28.16: Selection of Slice
Surface (p. 613).
Note
• Click Apply on the Details view to confirm this selection as the target face for the slice operation.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
612 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Slice Tool in DM
• Set the Slice Targets field to Selected Bodies (click the field to the right of Slice Targets). Select the
yellow bodies field (right box). The selection filter is automatically set to bodies. Select the heat sink body.
Click the Apply button to complete the selection.
• Observe that the original heat sink is sliced into two bodies as in Figure 28.18: Updated Tree Outline and
Graphics Window (p. 613).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 613
Translation of MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS DesignModel-
er
• Confirm that the left side of the heat sink is recognized as a valid Icepak body by going to Electronics →
Show Ice Bodies. The right side of the heat sink becomes invisible with this selection.
Note
In the Tree Outline, the icon for a valid Icepak body (left half of heat sink) is similar to the
icon used for the corresponding primitive, a block in this case, in Icepak.
Figure 28.19: Show Ice Bodies, Updated Tree Outline and Graphics Window
• Next, go to Electronics → Show CAD Bodies and confirm that only the right hand side of the heat sink
is visible with this selection.
Figure 28.20: Show CAD Bodies, Updated Tree Outline and Graphics Window
– Or select Show All Bodies from any of the context menus (right-click within the Tree Outline or the
Graphics window) to also make both bodies visible.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
614 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Simplify - Level 1
• As shown in Figure 28.22: Rename the Bodies After the Slice Operation (p. 615), right-click the names of
the bodies and rename the two bodies as CUSTOM-HEAT_SINK-SIMPLIFIED-LEFT and CUSTOM-
HEAT_SINK-SIMPLIFIED-RIGHT.
• In the next section, we shall use different simplify operations on the child bodies (created as a result of
the Slice operation).
• Select CUSTOM-HEAT_SINK-SIMPLIFIED-RIGHT.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 615
Translation of MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS DesignModel-
er
• Rename the Simplify field as L1_Simplify2.
Steps in Workbench:
• Go to the Workbench Project Schematic.
• Create a new Icepak component as shown below. Rename the Icepak component to Icepak-Simplify-
Level1 and establish a link between STEP Import (A2) and Icepak-Simplify-Level1 (C2).
• Double-click cell C2 (Setup for the Icepak module Icepak-Simplify-Level1) to open Icepak.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
616 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Simplify - Level 1
Steps in Icepak:
• Observe the Icepak model.
– Recall that Simplify operation is not required for regular Icepak shapes such as prisms, cylinders, uniform
polygons, and so on.
– If you do not wish to apply the automatically recognized shape, you can use DM to simplify the CAD
geometry as required.
– It is good practice to use simplification operations for all bodies that must be transferred to Icepak.
• Close Icepak.
Steps in Workbench
• Go back to the Workbench Project Schematic. Select the link from STEP Import to Icepak-Simplify-
Level1 module. Press the Delete key to delete the link and click OK to ignore the warning message that
appears.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 617
Translation of MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS DesignModel-
er
Figure 28.26: Updated Project Schematic
• The procedure for Simplify - Level 2 is identical to the procedures discussed above for Simplify - Level
0 or Simplify - Level 1, with the exception of the Simplification Type field, which must be set to Level
2.
• For this project, only the body at the left of Figure 28.18: Updated Tree Outline and Graphics Window (p. 613)
has a meaningful polygonal shape. Since ANSYS Icepak automatically recognizes this shape as a polygon
block, the default shape, you do not need to define the simplification for this body explicitly.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
618 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Simplification into Icepak Objects – Level 3
• Select the heat sink body and create a new Simplify operation.
• Observe that the facet quality is set to Very coarse. Keep this setting.
• Toggle between Electronics → Show Ice Bodies and Electronics → Show CAD Bodies to confirm that
the entire heat sink geometry has been converted to a valid Icepak body. You should not see any objects
in the Graphics window after selecting Show CAD Bodies.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 619
Translation of MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS DesignModel-
er
Figure 28.28: Updated Tree Outline and Details View for L3_Simplify3
Steps in Workbench
• Go to the Workbench Project Schematic.
• Create a new Icepak component as shown below. Rename the Icepak component to Icepak-Simplify-
Level3 and establish a link between STEP Import (A2) and Icepak-Simplify-Level3 (D2).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
620 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Simplification into Icepak Objects – Level 3
• Double-click cell D2 (Setup for the Icepak component Icepak-Simplify-Level3) to open Icepak.
Steps in Icepak
• Examine the Icepak model.
• Check the Icepak geometry information of the only block- note that the shape is set to CAD. This is an
Icepak CAD block.
Note
Since all the sides of this part were planar, the facet quality of very coarse was sufficient.
On the other hand, if the original CAD part contained more complex surfaces, such as b-
spline, torus, or partial or toroid cylinders, a finer resolution option might be required.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 621
Translation of MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS DesignModel-
er
Figure 28.30: Icepak Interface for Icepak-Simplify-Level3
• Close Icepak.
Steps in Workbench
• Go back to Workbench and save the project using File → Save.
28.15. Conclusion
In this tutorial, you:
• Became better acquainted with the different levels of simplification available within the DM Electronics
utility
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
622 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 29: Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak
Native Geometry Using ANSYS DesignModeler
29.1. Introduction
This tutorial describes procedures in ANSYS DesignModeler (DM) that enable you to work more efficiently
with assembly-level CAD models. The tutorial will discuss various aspects of model organization in DM
as well as illustrate the use of DM toward conversion of the CAD geometry to a native ANSYS Icepak
representation.
29.2. Prerequisites
To use this tutorial more effectively, you should have the following:
• Completion of the tutorial Translation of MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler in the Icepak Tutorials
• Familiarity with the conversion of CAD objects into Icepak native objects
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 623
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
Figure 29.1: Electronics Box Model
• Go to Tools → Options → Appearance. Scroll down and select the Beta Options check box.
– This tutorial requires the use of the Solid Extension feature, which is currently available as a beta feature
in DM.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
624 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Getting Started – ANSYS Workbench, Project Schematic
• Drag a Geometry component module from the Toolbox and drop it into the Project Schematic window
as shown in Figure 29.3: Create the Geometry Component (p. 626).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 625
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
Figure 29.3: Create the Geometry Component
• Select the Icepak component module from the Toolbox and drop it on cell A2 of MCAD to establish a link
between ANSYS DesignModeler and ANSYS Icepak.
• This completes the schematic representation of the project workflow. Figure 29.4: Updated Project
Schematic (p. 626) shows the updated Project Schematic.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
626 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Import of CAD Geometry
• Go to Tools → Options → . Click the Units node and select Millimeter for the Length Unit.
• While you are still in the Options panel, go to the Toolbars node. Set Slice, Freeze, Electronics, Analysis
Tools, Repair, Face Delete and Concept Modeling to Yes to make these utilities available in the Shortcuts
Toolbar as shown below.
Note
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 627
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
Figure 29.6: Updated Tree Outline and Graphics Window
– Use mouse movements and context menu options (Hide Body, Hide All Other Bodies, Show Body,
and Show All Bodies) as needed.
• The description indicates that there are 69 Parts and 69 Bodies in this setup.
• Expand the 69 Parts, 69 Bodies node and observe that although the node shows 69 parts, these are not
multi-body parts.
– For all practical purposes, the DM geometry, at this point, does not contain any parts. With DM, this is
true for any newly imported CAD geometry.
Note
As a part of the import operation in DM, all the CAD parts from the original CAD model
are retained in the correct locations as DM Bodies. However, the organization of the
CAD assemblies (irrespective of the import source) cannot be preserved in DM.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
628 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Initial Model Review
• Examine which objects are already recognized as compatible with Icepak native geometry.
1. Go to Electronics → Show Ice Bodies. This feature displays only those CAD bodies that have been
recognized by DM as valid for translation to Icepak.
2. Since no simplify operations have been performed yet, only the simple shape bodies are recognized
as valid for translation to Icepak at this instance.
3. Figure 29.8: DM Bodies Compatible with Icepak Native Geometry (p. 630) shows the bodies that can be
directly converted to Icepak native geometry without simplification in DesignModeler.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 629
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
Figure 29.8: DM Bodies Compatible with Icepak Native Geometry
Note
Using Show Ice Bodies also updates the icons for the Icepak-compatible bodies in the
Tree Outline.
• As shown below, the Analysis Tools and Repair utilities in DM can be used to fix incomplete or corrupt
geometry and connect disconnected geometry.
Note
The geometry used in this tutorial does not need any repair.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
630 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Suppress Non-Essential Bodies
• Objects like screws, bolts, nuts, washers, springs, and so on have negligible influence on the heat transfer
physics of a given problem and hence can be completely ignored for the CFD analysis.
• From the Tree Outline, holding down the Ctrl key, click all of the screws, bolts, nuts, and washers to select
them simultaneously.
• Right-click Fasteners and click Suppress Part to deactivate the geometry for the rest of the analysis.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 631
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
Figure 29.10: Create and Suppress Fasteners, Updated Graphical Display
Note
Generally, fasteners are non-essential for the CFD analysis. However, you must be careful
to include any heat spreading objects. Also, if combined thermo-mechanical analysis with
ANSYS Icepak and ANSYS Mechanical is planned, it is possible that some of the fasteners
are important for FEA purposes. In this case, you should include these fasteners in both
ANSYS Icepak and ANSYS Mechanical.
• The overall design of a product is usually conducted in terms of the different modules in the product,
each module performing a unique task. In the lifetime of a product, changes in design are likely to be
conducted in terms of the various functional modules.
• For a system level setup, models can be quickly organized in terms of the functionality of the various
bodies.
• Since ANSYS Icepak addresses the thermal and flow design aspects of the overall product design, it is
adequate to create DM parts that approximately correspond to the different functional modules. Often,
a functional module can be modeled by itself for detailed analysis.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
632 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Simple Shapes vs. Complex Shapes
Figure 29.11: Collapsed and Expanded Views for Newly Created Parts
Note
During the creation of parts, in case any objects are missed, create a separate part out of
those and then merge this part with the intended part. To merge multiple parts, which
can be a combination of suppressed and unsuppressed parts, hold down the Ctrl key while
selecting the parts that need to be merged, and then right-click the selection and select
Form New Part to complete the merging of the parts. Rename the newly formed part as
appropriate.
• This completes the initial review and organization of the CAD model for efficient translation to native
ANSYS Icepak geometry.
• Icepak primitive shapes are recognized as simple shapes for the DM-Icepak translation.
• Level 0, 1, or 2 from the Electronics → Simplify operation in DM can be used for the translation of simple
shapes to Icepak native geometry.
• Simple shapes such as rectangular prisms, cylinders, and uniform polygons are automatically converted
over to Icepak (the default Icepak primitive is the solid block type).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 633
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
• Go to WB and double-click cell B2 (the Setup cell from CFD module) to open the Icepak interface.
• In Icepak, right-click the Model node (from the Model manager window) and select Expand All.
• In Icepak, go to the Orient menu and select the Isometric view and then Scale to fit to reorient the
graphics display.
• Observe that the valid Ice bodies have been successfully converted to Icepak block objects.
Figure 29.12: Show Ice Bodies in DM (left) and Model with Same Objects in Icepak (right)
• Go to Electronics → Show CAD Bodies. This feature displays only those CAD bodies that need additional
work (modification of CAD geometry and/or defeaturing of CAD geometry and/or use of Electronics/Sim-
plify utility in DM).
• The Level 3 Simplify feature is used only for complex shapes which cannot be modeled as Icepak primitive
shapes.
– You must use the hex-dominant mesher (Mesher-HD) to mesh these shapes in Icepak.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
634 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
– Typically, complex shapes require more meshing effort. You should investigate the possibility of approx-
imating a complex-shaped CAD body by a simpler shape without noticeably affecting the heat transfer
physics.
Figure 29.14: Examples of Complex Shapes from Tutorial Geometry - Sheet Metal Heat Sink for
QFP1 Package and Flow Guide for Fan System
• For the sake of clarity, it is useful to display only the part that is currently of interest and hide all other
parts and bodies.
• A “Periphery to Center Marching” strategy will be employed to target the easily visible CAD bodies for
translation to Icepak native geometry progressively.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 635
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
Figure 29.16: Retain Only the Chassis Geometry in the Graphics Display Window
Chassis:
– DM – Electronics/Opening
→ Observe the circular through-hole at the top of the chassis and the two grilles made of rectangular
and circular hole patterns on the side walls of the chassis. These will be represented as free openings
in Icepak.
→ Go to Electronics → Opening.
→ From the graphics window, select the three chassis faces as shown below in Figure 29.17: Opening
Operation for Chassis – Selection of Candidate Faces (p. 636).
→ In the Details view for the opening operation, click Apply to accept this selection for the Faces field.
→ Observe the new entries in the Tree Outline. One new surface body and two new parts have been
created.
→ From the Tree Outline, right-click each of these newly created parts and surface body listings to re-
name them as shown below.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
636 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
• To merge the parts, select all four parts, Chassis; COVER_Inlet; HOUSING_Circ_Openings;
and HOUSING_Rect_Openings, right-click and then select Form New Part. Rename the part as
Chassis.
Chassis:
– DM – Electronics/Simplify
→ On the Shortcuts Toolbar, set the Selection Filter to Bodies.
→ From the graphics display area, select the two Chassis bodies, as shown in Figure 29.20: Selecting
Chassis Cover and Housing (p. 637), by holding down the Shift key.
• The same selection can also be made by expanding the node corresponding to the Chassis part
listing in the Tree Outline and selecting the bodies (using the Shift key) COVER and HOUSING.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 637
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
• Go to Electronics → Simplify and click Apply in the Details view to accept this selection.
• Click Generate.
Chassis:
– DM – Suppress All Other Parts
→ Collapse the Chassis node on the Tree Outline.
→ From the Tree Outline, as shown below, select all the parts other than Chassis and Fasteners,
right-click the selection and click Suppress Body. The Fasteners part need not be selected as it is
already in a suppressed state.
→ The suppressing of all other parts allows the selective transfer of the (simplified) Chassis geometry
to Icepak.
Figure 29.22: Suppressing All Parts Other Than Chassis and Updated Tree Outline View
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
638 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
Chassis:
– Icepak – Chassis Import
→ Go to the Icepak interface.
→ Go to File → Refresh Input Data and click Replace model on the Refresh input data pop-up screen
(see below) to replace the existing Icepak model.
→ Also, since the earlier version of the Icepak geometry was meant for understanding purposes only,
at the prompt, do not save the current Icepak geometry (click Don’t Save on the pop-up screen).
→ In Icepak, verify that only the Chassis assembly shows up in the Model manager window.
→ From the Model manager window, expand the Chassis assembly node to view the contents.
→ Verify, from the Model manager window and from the graphics display, that all the Chassis bodies,
surface bodies and solid bodies, have been correctly translated to corresponding opening and block
objects in Icepak.
→ Figure 29.24: Updated Icepak Graphics Display (p. 639) shows the isometric view of the Chassis
representation in Icepak:
→ Save the project using the File menu and select Save project in Icepak.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 639
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
Chassis:
– WB – Update Project Schematic
→ Go back to the WB interface and delete the link between the MCAD and the CFD modules as shown
in Figure 29.25: Delete Link Between MCAD and CFD Modules (p. 640).
• Doing so preserves the simplified Chassis geometry representation in Icepak for separate analysis
despite any new changes to the MCAD module.
• Drag a new Icepak component from the WB Toolbox and drop on cell A2 of the MCAD module to
create a new DM-Icepak link.
Note
This new link will be used to process the Motherboard part in DM for translation
to native Icepak geometry.
• In the Tree Outline, right-click the Chassis part and select Suppress Part.
• Next, as shown below right-click the Motherboard part and select Unsuppress Part to make only
the Motherboard part geometry visible on the graphics display and available for further processing.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
640 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
Motherboard:
– DM – Electronics/Simplify
→ In the Shortcuts Toolbar, set the Selection Filter to Bodies.
→ Also, as shown in Figure 29.28: Set Select Mode to Box Select (p. 641), on the Shortcuts Toolbar, set
the Select Mode to Box Select. Note the change in the cursor display.
→ Draw a box to include all the Motherboard part geometry. As shown below, the selected geometry
will be shaded solid (zero transparency).
Note
You can also select the Motherboard bodies by selecting the node Motherboard
from the Tree Outline.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 641
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
Figure 29.29: Use Box Select to Select All the Geometry From the Motherboard Part
→ Go to Electronics → Simplify and click Apply in the Details view to accept this selection.
→ Click Generate.
→ Observe the simplified representation of the Motherboard part geometry in the graphics display.
→ You have successfully converted all the bodies from the Motherboard part to valid Ice bodies.
→ Go to Electronics → Show CAD Bodies and confirm that the corresponding graphics display is empty.
Motherboard:
– Icepak – Import Motherboard Geometry
→ Go back to the WB interface
→ Double-click cell C2 (the Setup cell for the CFD-Motherboard module) to open Icepak.
→ In Icepak, verify that only the Motherboard assembly is visible in the Model manager window.
→ From the Model manager window, expand the Motherboard assembly node to view the contents.
→ Verify that all the bodies from the Motherboard part in DM have been correctly converted to cor-
responding block objects in Icepak.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
642 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
→ Go to File menu and select Close Icepak to close the Icepak interface.
Motherboard:
– WB – Update Project Schematic
→ Go back to the WB interface and delete the link between the MCAD and the CFD-Motherboard
modules.
→ Drag a new Icepak component from the WB Toolbox and drop on cell A2 of the MCAD module to
create a new DM-Icepak link.
→ This new link will be used to process the QFP-1 part in DM for translation to native Icepak geometry.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 643
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
•Translating the QFP-1 Part Geometry
– Go back to the DM interface.
– In the Tree Outline, suppress the Motherboard part and unsuppress the QFP-1 part.
QFP-1:
– DM – Electronics/Simplify
→ From the Tree Outline, expand the node corresponding to the QFP-1 part.
→ Observe that there are two bodies (SM-HEATSINK and QFP-1) listed under this part. Here, SM-
HEATSINK represents the sheet metal heatsink and QFP-1 represents the IC package.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
644 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
• In the Details view for this Simplify operation, set the Facet quality to Fine. Click Generate to
complete the simplify operation.
→ Simplify the QFP-1 body using a level 0 Simplify operation. Click Generate to complete the simplify
operation.
Figure 29.34: Updated Tree Outline Listing and Simplified Representation for QFP-1 Part
– Using cell D2 (the Setup cell for the CFD-QFP1 module) from the WB Project Schematic, open Icepak.
– Verify that all the bodies from the QFP-1 part in DM have been correctly converted to corresponding
block objects in Icepak.
– Double-click SM-HEATSINK from the Model manager window to access the Edit panel for this block.
Go to the Geometry tab and note that the geometry shape is set to CAD.
→ This will always be the case when the level for simplification in DM is set to Level 3.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 645
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
– Go to the File menu and select Close Icepak to close the Icepak interface.
QFP-1:
– WB – Update Project Schematic
→ As before, delete the link between the MCAD and the CFD-QFP1 modules.
– In the Tree Outline, suppress the QFP-1 part and unsuppress the CPU-Box part.
→ From the Tree Outline, expand the node corresponding to the CPU-Box part.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
646 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
Figure 29.37: Updated Tree Outline View and Graphics Display in DM (Iso and +Z views)
→ Display one body at a time using the Hide function. Since the bodies contain geometric features that
are important for thermal analysis, it is a good practice to examine them and determine how to
capture the features in the CFD model.
→ CPU_Socket: Observe that CPU_Socket contains a cavity in the center. When the CPU is mounted,
the air pocket in this cavity reduces the heat flow from the CPU to the PCB. It is important to capture
the effect of this air pocket. Simplification using the level 1 simplification scheme will not recognize
this cavity automatically. A new volume body will be created to model the cavity explicitly.
→ TIM: Note the small thickness of TIM between the heat sink base and the CPU case. To avoid unne-
cessary mesh refinement due to this small thickness, the TIM body will be set up as a contact resistance
plate in Icepak.
CPU-Box:
– DM - Filling the Cavity Within CPU_SOCKET
→ Use the Hide All Other Bodies function so that only the CPU_SOCKET body is visible on the
graphics display.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 647
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
→ Using the Ctrl key, select all the inside faces that correspond to the cavity. The selected faces are
highlighted in green (see below) in the graphics display.
Note
You should have 8 faces selected in total. Rotate the model in order to select all of
the faces.
→ Go to Tools → Fill and click Apply in the corresponding Details view (see below) to accept the se-
lection.
→ Click Generate.
→ In the Tree Outline, select the newly generate body named Solid and verify that it accurately
represents the cavity within the CPU_SOCKET body.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
648 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
→ Merge the body Socket_Cavity with the CPU-Box part by selecting both of them in the Tree
Outline and then clicking Form New Part.
CPU-Box:
– TIM as a Surface Body in DM (Plate in Icepak)
→ Hide CPU_SOCKET and Socket_Cavity. Show CPU and TIM again.
→ Select any one of the short edges (corresponding to the thickness) of the body TIM.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 649
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
→ Go to Tools → Analysis Tools → Entity Information to report the detailed information for the selected
edge in the Details view.
→ Note that the length of the edge, or the thickness of TIM, is 0.254 mm.
→ Reducing TIM into a 2D representation (surface body in DM and plate in Icepak) will leave a 0.254
mm gap, which must be filled by one of the neighboring objects (HEAT_SINK or CPU).
→ Hence, placement of the 2D TIM surface body on the CPU body will require extension of the
HEAT_SINK base by 0.254 mm.
• The additional 0.254 mm of aluminum (the HEAT_SINK material) only marginally increases the
overall thermal resistance and hence is an acceptable approximation.
• Alternatively, the placement of the 2D TIM on the HEAT_SINK body, which requires the extension
of CPU, or somewhere in-between, which would require the extension of both CPU and HEAT_SINK,
can also be considered.
→ Right-click the body CPU and select Hide All Other Bodies.
→ Go to the main menu and then select Concept → Surface from Faces.
→ Select the top side of the CPU body (as shown below).
→ Click Generate.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
650 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
→ Note that a new surface body named CPU shows up within the CPU-Box part in the Tree Outline.
CPU-Box:
– DM - Extend Heat_Sink Body
→ Right-click the HEAT_SINK body and hide all other bodies.
→ Click Generate.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 651
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
Figure 29.47: Use of Solid Extension
→ Note that the gap (introduced due to the suppressing of the original TIM body) is now filled with
HEAT_SINK body material as shown in Figure 29.48: Before and After Use of Solid Extension (p. 652).
CPU-Box:
– DM - Electronics/Simplify
→ From the Tree Outline, right-click the part CPU-Box and then select Show All Bodies. Right-click
the body TIM to suppress it again.
→ Go to Electronics → Simplify.
→ Using Box Select, select all the visible bodies from the graphical display. You should have 5 bodies
selected.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
652 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
→ Click Generate.
→ Merge the newly created parts with the CPU-Box part as shown in Figure 29.50: Merge Newly Created
Parts into CPU-Box Part, Updated Tree Outline View (p. 653).
Figure 29.50: Merge Newly Created Parts into CPU-Box Part, Updated Tree Outline View
CPU-Box:
– Icepak - Import CPU-Box Part Geometry
→ Using cell E2 (the Setup cell for the CFD-CPU-Box module) from the WB Project Schematic, open
Icepak.
→ Verify that all the bodies (except the TIM_plate body) from the CPU-Box part in DM have been
correctly converted to corresponding block objects in Icepak.
Note
→ The isometric view of the CPU-Box part representation in Icepak is shown in Figure 29.51: Updated
Icepak Graphics Display (p. 654).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 653
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
• The TIM_plate plate object has been highlighted using View → Default shading → Selected
solid feature in Icepak.
→ Go to the File menu and select Close Icepak to close the Icepak interface.
CPU-Box:
– WB- Update Project Schematic
→ As before, delete the link between the MCAD and the CFD-CPU-Box modules.
→ Save the project using the File menu, click Save in WB.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
654 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
– In the Tree Outline, suppress the CPU-Box part and unsuppress the Fan-system part.
→ From the Tree Outline, expand the node corresponding to the Fan-system part.
→ Observe that the Fan-system part consists of two bodies:FLOW_GUIDE and NIDEC_D34776, the
fan.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 655
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
Figure 29.53: Updated Tree Outline View and Graphics Display in DM (Iso view)
Fan-system:
– DM - Electronics/Fan
→ Go to Electronics → Fan.
→ In the Shortcuts Toolbar, set Select Mode to Single Select. Note the change in the cursor display.
→ For the Body to Extract Fan Data field, select the fan housing geometry from the graphics display
as shown in Figure 29.54: Electronics/Fan – Selection of Body to Extract Fan Data (p. 656). Alternatively,
you can simply select NIDEC_D34667 from the Tree Outline.
→ In the Details view, go to Hub/Casing Faces. This corresponds to the cylindrical faces of the fan bore
and the hub. These will be converted into the fan radius and hub radius in the corresponding Icepak
fan object.
→ While holding down the Ctrl key, select the two faces as shown in Figure 29.55: Electronics/Fan –
Selection of Hub/Casing Faces (p. 657). The order of face selection does not matter.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
656 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
→ Click Generate.
→ Observe that the NIDEC_D34667 fan geometry is no longer visible. This indicates that you have
successfully translated the fan geometry between DM and Icepak.
Fan-system:
– DM - FLOW_GUIDE - Simplification Strategy
→ Review the FLOW_GUIDE geometry.
→ The top of the flow guide is planar and has an opening. The sides expand non-uniformly and with a
curvature. The final “base” sides are also planar.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 657
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
→ To minimize the mesh, the FLOW-GUIDE body will be represented using zero thickness plate objects
in Icepak.
• The planar sides and the top opening will be modeled as simple Icepak objects.
• The expansion has a complex shape which can only be modeled as a CAD plate.
→ To retain the exact flow volume within the FLOW_GUIDE, the plates will be constructed using inner
faces of the FLOW_GUIDE body.
Fan-system:
– DM - FLOW_GUIDE Top Side
→ In DM, set the Selection Filter to Faces.
→ Select the inner face of the top side of the FLOW_GUIDE body as shown in Figure 29.57: Inner Face
of the Top Side of the FLOW_GUIDE Body, Electronics/Opening (p. 658).
Figure 29.57: Inner Face of the Top Side of the FLOW_GUIDE Body, Electronics/Opening
→ Go to Electronics → Opening.
→ Click Generate.
→ Note that a new surface body named FLOW_GUIDE_1 has been created.
→ From the Tree Outline, merge this surface body with the Fan-system part.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
658 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
→ As shown below in Figure 29.59: FLOW_GUIDE – Selection of Outer Edges for Inner Face of Top
Side (p. 659), select the four outer edges, highlighted in green, of the inner face of the top side of the
FLOW_GUIDE body. You should have 4 edges selected.
Figure 29.59: FLOW_GUIDE – Selection of Outer Edges for Inner Face of Top Side
→ Click Generate.
→ Note that a new surface body named Surface Body has been created at the bottom of the Tree
Outline.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 659
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
Figure 29.60: FLOW_GUIDE – New Surface Body Created Using ‘Surfaces from Edges’
→ From the Tree Outline, merge Flow_Guide_Top_Face with the Fan-system part.
Fan-system:
– DM - FLOW_GUIDE - Non-Uniform and Base Sides
→ Set the Selection Filter to Faces.
→ From the graphics display as shown below, select the inner faces of the non-uniform sides of the
FLOW_GUIDE body. You should have 4 faces selected.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
660 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
→ Click Generate.
→ From the Tree Outline, note that a new surface body named FLOW_GUIDE has been created within
the Fan-system part.
→ Go to the View menu and select Wireframe to better visualize the newly created surface body.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 661
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
→ Using the same procedure, create surface bodies using the inner faces of the base sides of the
FLOW_GUIDE body.
Note
→ After clicking Generate, rename the resulting surface bodies as shown in Figure 29.64: FLOW_GUIDE
Base Sides – Newly Created Surface Bodies (p. 662).
→ Using the level 3 Simplify operation, convert the Flow_Guide_Non-Uniform-Face surface body
to a CAD plate representation in Icepak.
• Set the Facet Quality in the Details view to Very Fine for this simplify operation. Click Generate
to complete the Simplify operation.
→ Go to Electronics → Show CAD Bodies and note that only the original FLOW_GUIDE body is visible.
→ Go back to the Shaded Exterior and Edges view using the View menu.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
662 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
Fan-system:
– Icepak - Import Fan-system Part Geometry
→ Using cell F2 (the Setup cell for the CFD-Fan-System module) from the WB Project Schematic,
open Icepak.
→ Verify that all the bodies from the Fan-system part in DM have been correctly converted to the
corresponding fan, opening, and plate objects in Icepak.
Note
→ The isometric view of the Fan-system part representation in Icepak is shown below.
• The View → Default Shading → Solid feature is used to show the solid rendering of the Icepak
geometry:
→ Go to the File menu and select Close Icepak to close the Icepak interface.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 663
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
Fan-system:
– WB - Update Project Schematic
→ As before, delete the link between the MCAD and the CFD-Fan-System modules.
→ Right-click the white space in the Project Schematic window and select the Fit option to resize the
Project Schematic display.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
664 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
– In the Tree Outline, suppress the Fan-system part and unsuppress the Memory part.
→ From the Tree Outline, expand the node corresponding to the Memory part.
Figure 29.68: Updated Tree Outline View and Graphics Display in DM (Iso and +Z views)
– Note
The DIMM_SOCKET-1 surface bodies will not be used in the Icepak setup and hence
can be suppressed.
Memory:
– DM - Electronics/Simplify Level 1
→ From the Tree Outline, hide the DIMM_HS4 body and the two DIMM_TIMM bodies.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 665
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
→ Use the level 1 Simplify operation to simplify the DIMM body and the two DIMM_SOCKET bodies.
→ From the Tree Outline, merge the newly created parts, as shown in Figure 29.71: Updated Tree Outline
View (p. 666), with the Memory part. Name the merged part Memory again.
→ Rename the DIMM_8 body as DIMM_PCB and the remaining DIMM bodies as DIMM_IC as shown:
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
666 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
Memory:
– DM - Surface Bodies for DIMM_TIM
→ Select the two DIMM_TIM bodies.
→ Right-click the selection and click Hide All Other Bodies as shown in Figure 29.72: Updated Tree
Outline and Graphics Display (p. 668).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 667
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
Figure 29.72: Updated Tree Outline and Graphics Display
→ The DIMM_TIM bodies will be modeled as contact resistance plates in Icepak and hence need to be
represented as surface bodies in DM.
→ While holding down the Ctrl key, select the inner faces for the two DIMM_TIM bodies as shown in
Figure 29.73: Selection of Inner Faces for DIMM_TIM Bodies (p. 668). The inner surfaces are in contact
with: the casing tops of all the DIMM_IC bodies and the opposite side of DIMM_PCB. The design
intent is to model the contact resistances at these locations; therefore it is important to select the
two inner faces for this feature operation.
→ Use the Concept menu and select Surfaces From Faces to create corresponding surface bodies.
Click Apply in the Details view and then click Generate.
→ Note that two new surface bodies named DIMM_TIMM are now listed within the Memory part listing
in the Tree Outline.
• Since the newly created surface bodies are simple shapes, they are automatically recognized as
valid Icepak plate objects.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
668 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
Memory:
– DM - Recreate DIMM_HS4 and Simplify Using Electronics/Simplify
Level 3
→ Show the DIMM_HS4 body. Now the DIMM_HS4, DIMM_TIM_Plate1, and DIMM_TIM_Plate2
bodies are visible.
→ Go back to the +Z view and zoom in as shown in Figure 29.75: Updated Graphics Display and Zoom-
in +Z View (p. 670).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 669
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
Figure 29.75: Updated Graphics Display and Zoom-in +Z View
→ Note that there is a small gap between the DIMM_TIM_Plate surface bodies and the DIMM_HS4
body.
→ This gap equals the thickness of the original DIMM_TIM body, which is 0.0776 mm.
• This gap can be measured using Analysis Tools /Distance Finder or Analysis Tools /Entity In-
formation.
→ Pick any thin edge of the DIMM-HS4 body and find its thickness using Analysis Tools /Entity Inform-
ation.
• It is 0.5 mm thick. Thus the total thickness from the outer surface of DIMM_HS4 to the
DIMM_TIM_Plate (nearest to the selected surface) is 0.5776 mm.
→ From the graphics display, as shown below, select any outer face of DIMM_HS4.
→ From the Shortcuts toolbar use the Extended Selection feature (see Figure 29.76: Recreating the
Heatsink Geometry (p. 671)) and select Extend to Limits. This will select all the outer faces of Heat
sink.
→ Set the Direction field to Inward and the field FD1, Thickness (>=0) to 0.5776 mm.
→ Click Generate.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
670 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
→ Observe that the gap between the DIMM_HS4 body and the DIMM_TIM_Plate surface bodies no
longer exists.
→ Using the level 3 Simplify operation, simplify the DIMM_HS4 body for a CAD-type block representation
in Icepak.
• Set the Facet Quality in the Details view to Very Fine for this Simplify operation. Click Generate
to complete this operation.
Memory:
– Icepak - Import Memory Part Geometry
→ Using cell G2 (the Setup cell for the CFD-Memory module) from the WB Project Schematic, open
Icepak.
→ Verify that all the bodies from the Memory part in DM have been correctly converted to the corres-
ponding block and plate objects in Icepak.
Note
→ The isometric view of the Memory part representation in Icepak is shown in Figure 29.77: Updated
Icepak Graphics Display (p. 672).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 671
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
• The View → Default shading → Solid/Wire feature was used to display the solid rendering in
Icepak.
→ Go to the File menu and select Close Icepak to close the Icepak interface.
Memory:
– WB – Update Project Schematic
→ As before, delete the link between the MCAD and the CFD-Memory modules.
→ Right-click the white space in the Project Schematic window and select the Fit option to resize the
Project Schematic modules.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
672 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Translation of CAD Bodies to ANSYS Icepak
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 673
Translation of System Level MCAD Geometry to Icepak Native Geometry Using ANSYS
DesignModeler
•System Level Setup in Icepak
– Go back back to the DM interface.
– Go to the WB interface.
– Using cell H2 (the Setup cell for the CFD-System module) from the WB Project Schematic, open
Icepak.
– Verify that all the bodies from the DM setup have been correctly converted to corresponding block,
plate, fan, opening objects in Icepak.
Figure 29.79: Updated DM Tree Outline, DM Graphics Display, Icepak Graphics Display
– Go to the File menu and select Close Icepak to close the Icepak interface.
– The MCAD-Icepak translation for this system level electronics box setup is now complete.
29.14. Summary
In this tutorial, the following features/capabilities have been discussed:
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
674 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 30: MRF Tutorial
30.1. Introduction
The purpose of this tutorial is to provide guidelines and recommendations for the Moving Reference
Frame (MRF) fan modeling technique in ANSYS Icepak. These guidelines and recommendations concern
the areas of
• Problem Setup
• Solver settings
30.2. Prerequisites
• Familiarity with Icepak interface, and having a good understanding of basic problem setup and solution
procedure.
An Icepak 3D fan object may sometimes behave differently from real fan behavior. Typically this is due
to flow features like swirl and centrifugal spread resultant from the spinning fan rotor as well as the
rotor blade geometry. In an Icepak fan based setup, this swirl is estimated and calculated off a 2D an-
nular flow face rather than off the physical surfaces of the blade.
The MRF approach allows for a more accurate representation of the internal geometry of the fan and
therefore results in a better modeling of the flow features. In Icepak MRF simulations, the actual blade
geometry is modeled as a CAD block object and a fluid cylinder rotates into contact with the surfaces
to create a spinning flow.
In this tutorial, you will use a previously built Icepak model of fan blades (Figure 30.1: A 3D Icepak Fan
Object Assembly (p. 676)a) and create the rotating MRF fluid blocks to create flow in the model. You
will learn the proper problem setup and solution settings for an MRF model, as well as a good meshing
technique to insure good results.
As an added bonus, a 3D Icepak fan object assembly (Figure 30.1: A 3D Icepak Fan Object Assembly
(p. 676)b) can be activated and run to see the difference in flow patterns and results.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 675
MRF Tutorial
Note
In Icepak, models can be compressed into a specialized zip file with the extension tzr. This
is called “packing” a project. The essential files needed to properly re-build the model, in-
cluding the mesh settings, are saved in this compressed file. A model has been previously
created to reduce the time needed to properly teach the MRF techniques in Icepak and
will be opened out of this packed file.
• Download the file “MRF_Tutorial.tzr” and select this file to unpack. You will then be able to create a project
folder for this tutorial. Choose the location and name the project “MRF_Practice”.
Note
• Once the model has opened, go to the Model node. Perform a right mouse click and select, Expand All
to open all model nodes.
• Next, go to the Model menu and select CAD data. Click None under Families to turn off the CAD display.
• Set the orientation to the isometric view to display the model geometry as shown below.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
676 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Modifying the Geometry
Note
You can activate the assembly by selecting it and then using the Ctrl A shortcut or by
right clicking and selecting Active.
• An assembly containing the CAD fan blades (rotors), fan casing blocks, and fan tray cutout blocks should
appear.
• Expand the FANS_CAD.1 assembly node on the Model tree to view the fan blade geometry.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 677
MRF Tutorial
• Click on any object inside of the FANS_CAD.1 assembly and create two fluid blocks surrounding the fan
blades and cutting through the casing blocks using the information provided in Table 30.1: Fluid Block
Settings for MRF Setup (p. 678) below.
Note
If your current object selection is not inside of the assembly, the new fluid cylinders would
appear outside and have to be dragged into the assembly. This is saving this extra step.
Another time saver would be to create FluidA and then copy the object. You would just
need to change the name of the copy to FluidB and change the zC location.
• As shown in Figure 30.3: Fluid Blocks Surrounding Fan Blade Geometry (p. 679), the fluid cylinder blocks
will be created at the bottom of the assembly list. This is because Icepak will, by default, give the newest
objects the highest meshing priority. The fluid blocks need to have a higher priority than the case blocks
but a LOWER priority than the fan rotor so that the rotor will be fully meshed. To automatically change
the meshing priority, highlight both these fluid cylinders in the Model tree, and drag them above the fan
blades (drop them on top of the upper most blade). The assembly should now look like Figure 30.4: Updated
Model Tree View (p. 679).
• Double click on FluidA in the Model tree. Under the Properties tab, select Use rotation for MRF and set
a rotational speed of 6000 as seen in Figure 30.5: MRF Settings (p. 680). Repeat this for FluidB.
• The rotation rpm here refers to the rotation of the fan rotor and blades. The direction follows the right
hand thumb rule.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
678 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Modifying the Geometry
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 679
MRF Tutorial
• To start, go to the global mesh settings panel by clicking on the shortcut and ensure the mesh type
isMesher-HD.
• Set the Minimum gap values to 1 mm in all directions and update the dialog to look like Figure 30.6: Global
Mesh Settings (p. 681).
Note
HD meshing starts with a default hexa-unstructured mesh, and progressively uses other
element types (tetrahedral, etc.) in areas where geometric complexity does not allow for
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
680 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Generating the Mesh
a good mesh with hexa elements. This “mesh mixing” occurs automatically in the meshing
algorithm.
Note
Proper resolution of CAD objects requires more mesh. Resolving surfaces with curvatures
typically requires more mesh than planar faces.
• To restrict the finer mesh to the region immediately surrounding the fans, a non-conformal mesh should
be used. Double click the “FANS_CAD.1” assembly and go to the Meshing tab. Select the Mesh separately
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 681
MRF Tutorial
option and fill out the slack and max element sizes as shown in Figure 30.7: Non-conformal Mesh Settings
for FANS_CAD.1 Assembly (p. 683).
Note
The positive slack values define the distance off the outermost surfaces of all objects in
the assembly. While ANSYS Icepak v13.0 does allow for zero slack specification, it is recom-
mended to use a positive value in MRF cases to ensure good mesh transition from solid
surfaces into the fluid.
• Turn on the Allow multi-level meshing option, ensure Proximity size function and Curvature size
function are selected. Also, turn on the Set uniform mesh params option.
Note
The Set uniform mesh params option will block off regions around complex geometries
and allow for a better mesh transition.
• Click on the Edit levels button in the Multi-level tab and set the meshing levels as shown in Fig-
ure 30.8: “Edit Levels” Settings for FANS_CAD.1 Assembly (p. 684).
Note
Multi-level meshing allows the user to control the mesh sizing near the surfaces of CAD
objects without filling the entire non-conformal region with small elements. It is also known
as a hanging node mesh where a cell edge is split into two smaller edges as the mesh
gets closer to the surface. Thus each face is split into four smaller faces, and each cell into
eight smaller cells.
Note
In Figure 30.7: Non-conformal Mesh Settings for FANS_CAD.1 Assembly (p. 683), the max
sizes in all three directions are the largest elements. The levels value set per object is the
number of times that element size will be split in half. For example, with 4 mm being the
largest element, 2 levels would correspond to a refinement of 4/2 = 2 mm for the first split
and 2/2 = 1 mm for the smallest element on that object.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
682 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Generating the Mesh
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 683
MRF Tutorial
• You are now ready to generate the mesh. Go back to the global settings and click on the Generate button
near the top of the pop-up window. There should be about 742,000 elements in the model.
Note
It is especially important to check the surface meshes of CAD objects. If too large of an
element is being used near the surface, you may see bad elements protruding away from
or into the surface.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
684 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Examine the Mesh
• Next, create a plane cut of the mesh through the center of one of the fan rotors on the z axis. The mesh
display should look similar to Figure 30.10: Mesh Display - Cut Plane Through Rotor Center (p. 685) (Switch
off the previous surface display).
Note
To do this properly, hit Shift-x to look at the x axis, select the Cut plane option in the
Display tab under meshing, click on the drop down menu next to Set position, select
Vertical - screen select and click on the center of either fan hub. This will draw a vertical
line through the selected point. Hit Shift-z to look at the plane through that line.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 685
MRF Tutorial
• Go to Problem setup → Basic Parameters and under Flow regime change the turbulence model in the
drop down menu to Realizable two equation as shown in Figure 30.11: Modify Choice for Turbulence
Model (p. 686).
• Go to Solution settings → Basic settings under the Model tree and set the Number of iterations to
1000 (adequate for this model).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
686 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Solution Settings for MRF Fan Model
• Also, set the flow convergence criteria to 1e-5 and input the changes as shown in Figure 30.12: Basic
Solution Settings (p. 687).
Note
When using MRF, the solver typically needs a larger number of iterations to completely
converge. When running the initial solution it is recommended that you set the number
of iterations to something on the order of 2000 or more to see where the convergence
finally occurs. You can lower the number of iterations in subsequent solutions with the
use of solution restart. It is also recommended to lower the convergence criteria to ensure
this convergence.
Point Monitors
• When running any simulation you should also include a few temperature and a few velocity monitor
points to ensure that there is complete convergence. In a steady state problem, you can have greater
confidence in the solution convergence, when the monitor values do not change for an extended number
of iterations.
• In an MRF problem, there should be multiple velocity point monitors between different blades and located
in the fluid. To do this, go the tree, right click the Points branch and select the Create at location option.
• An easy method of creating such points is to first create a plane cut display of the mesh, as shown in
Figure 30.13: Easy Method to Snap Point Monitors to the Mesh Display (p. 688). Specify the monitor point
name and variable in the Create point panel. Finally use the Nearest option to snap the point to a grid
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 687
MRF Tutorial
location. The location of point monitors used in this tutorial are presented in Table 30.2: Location of Point
Monitors (p. 688).
• Click on in the shortcuts toolbar to bring up the Solve panel. Click on the Start solution button to
run the computations.
• If the model is set up properly as per the instructions, then the residual plots and the monitor plots should
look like Figure 30.14: Residuals Plot (p. 689).-Figure 30.16: Velocity Monitors (p. 690)
Figure 30.13: Easy Method to Snap Point Monitors to the Mesh Display
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
688 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Solution Settings for MRF Fan Model
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 689
MRF Tutorial
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
690 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Post-processing the Results
• Create an object face with the shortcut. Select all of the solid objects (blocks) other than those in
the fan assembly and select Show contours. Click on the Parameters button, leave the default contours
of Temperature, and change the color levels to Calculated This object. The temperature contour should
look similar to Figure 30.17: Surface Temperature Contours (p. 691).
• Deactivate the temperature object face (right click and click on Active) from the Post node on the Model
tree.
• Create a plane cut with the shortcut and leave it at the default z plane through center location.
Select Contours of speed and set the color levels to be specified from 0 to 3 (velocities higher than 3 m/s
will show up as red). The MRF speed contour display should look similar to Figure 30.18: Contour of Speed
at Center of Z with MRF (p. 692).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 691
MRF Tutorial
• Go to Solution settings → Basic settings and change the flow criteria to 1e-4.
• Go to the Solve panel and make sure that the Solution ID is different than the once used for the MRF
run. It will take much less time to run this model. You can terminate the model once the residuals and
monitor points all level off.
• Create the same speed contour as you did in the MRF run. The contour should resemble Figure 30.19: Con-
tour of Speed at Center of Z with Icepak 3D Fan Object (p. 692). Compare this flow pattern to Fig-
ure 30.18: Contour of Speed at Center of Z with MRF (p. 692).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
692 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 31: Modeling an Airborne Electronics System at Altitude
31.1. Introduction
There are numerous methods for cooling electronics systems and the choice of technique is generally
a function of the design, application, reliability requirements and power dissipation. For avionic elec-
tronics, one common approach is to use ambient or chilled air ducted over the sealed chassis of the
system in a cold wall. Heat from the components conducts through the PCB to the card guides that
are clamped to the chassis and removed via the cold wall.
This technique also removes any risk to the actual electronics arising from dust, moisture etc… in the
air flow, and thus increases the operating reliability.
Operating conditions of such equipment vary considerably due to the density variation of air from sea
level to cruising altitude. As the altitude increases, the density decreases, and consequently the mass
flow rates of the fan(s) are also reduced.
In this exercise a cold-wall cooled avionics unit will be modeled and the cooling efficiency evaluated
at both sea level and altitude.
This exercise assumes you have had already created some models in Icepak, and in particular have ex-
perience in meshing assemblies separately and also in setting up parametric simulations.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 693
Modeling an Airborne Electronics System at Altitude
Note
This is the basic cold wall geometry with two parametric runs defined. The first assumes a uniform
loading of 30 W per PCB, giving a total dissipation of 450 W for the cards. This is applied uniformly to
the card edges on both sides of the chassis.
An additional 30 W is applied to the front of the unit opposite the fan to represent any additional load
from additional equipment. The total power can be viewed in the Power and temperature limit setup
panel as shown below.
Heat can only be conducted out of the unit, so the interior air is not modeled, and replaced by a hollow
block. Recall that within a hollow block no equations are solved, and no mesh is generated, so this
methodology reduces the problem down to a worst case scenario.
Next, you need to add two heat sinks to represent the finned cold walls on the sides of the unit.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
694 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Adding the Fins
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 695
Modeling an Airborne Electronics System at Altitude
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
696 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Adding the Fins
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 697
Modeling an Airborne Electronics System at Altitude
Create an assembly for each heat sink and choose to mesh each assembly separately and apply appro-
priate slack values. Slack values are displayed in Figure 31.6: Heat Sink Assembly Slack Values (p. 699).
Note
Rename your assemblies to match the heat sinks’ names as shown above.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
698 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Modeling the effects of Altitudes
Tip
You could have also made the second heat sink by copying the first and then using the
alignment tools to re-position it.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 699
Modeling an Airborne Electronics System at Altitude
Go to the Advanced tab. Select the Altitude check box and ensure that the Update fan curves check
box is also selected. Enter $Elevation for the Altitude field. This creates a variable for altitude that
you will soon specify. Change the units to m. The Basic parameters panel should resemble that of
Figure 31.8: The Advanced Tab of the Basic parameters Panel (p. 701).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
700 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Modeling the effects of Altitudes
The Param value panel will appear upon opening the Parameters and optimization panel. Enter
10000 in the text box. This assigns an initial value of 10 kilometers for the variable Elevation.
Select the Design variables tab and then the Elevation node in the Parameters and optimization
panel. Next to Discrete values, type 0, separated by a space before 10000 as shown in Figure 31.9: As-
signing Variable for Altitude (p. 702).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 701
Modeling an Airborne Electronics System at Altitude
Now edit the fan object (fan.1) in the model. At altitude the inlet temperature will be very different
from the same flow rate at sea level. Assign a parameter for the inlet temperature as shown in the Fans
panel of Figure 31.10: Assigning Parameters for Inlet Temperature (p. 703). Initialize the variable Flow_T
with a value of -5 after updating the fan object. The temperature parameter should take the values 20
and -5 ºC as shown in the Parameters and optimization panel of Figure 31.10: Assigning Parameters
for Inlet Temperature (p. 703). Apply these settings, and reset the trials. Check that the correct combin-
ation of parameters for sea level, and 10 Km for elevation have been assigned.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
702 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Modeling the effects of Altitudes
In the Functions tab of the Parameters and optimization panel, create three functions, one to report
the global maximum temperature and the other two to calculate the pressure drop across each of the
heat sinks. Figure 31.11: Primary Functions (p. 704) and Table 31.1: Functions (p. 704) show the functions’
names and specifications.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 703
Modeling an Airborne Electronics System at Altitude
Click Run to run the trials and then analyze the two simulations to compare results. Generate some
particle tracks from the fan through the system and display the object faces of the two heat sinks.
Create a summary report for both runs for the temperatures of the sources. Combine these into an
HTML report.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
704 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Modeling the effects of Altitudes
Create particle traces with the shortcut. In the Object face panel that appears, select object
fan.1 and select the Show particle traces option. Click the Parameters button and leave the default
settings. Change the color levels to Calculated This object. The particle traces should look similar to
Figure 31.13: Particle Traces (p. 705).
Deactivate the temperature object face (right-click face.1 in the Model manager window and deselect
Active).
Create an object face to display temperature contours on the heat sink objects. The object face should
look similar to those in Figure 31.14: Temperature Contours on heat_sink_minx and
heat_sink_maxx (p. 706).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 705
Modeling an Airborne Electronics System at Altitude
31.5. Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to model the effects of altitude in ANSYS Icepak by using the Parameters
and optimization panel to create parametric variables.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
706 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 32: Maxwell to ANSYS Icepak Coupling Tutorial
32.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates how heat loss data can be transferred from Maxwell to ANSYS Icepak in
ANSYS Workbench. This tutorial involves an eddy current solver of Maxwell to calculate heat losses
which are then applied to ANSYS Icepak to simulate natural convection.
32.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have little experience with ANSYS Workbench and so each step will be
explicitly described. A Maxwell V17 license is needed to perform this tutorial.
Note
When ANSYS Workbench starts, the Toolbox and Project Schematic are displayed.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 707
Maxwell to ANSYS Icepak Coupling Tutorial
• Specify a name for your project (i.e.,. maxwell2wb) and save the Workbench project file. File>Save As...
• Change the file type to Maxwell Project File (*.mxwl) and browse to the location of the tutorial input file.
• Select the file Ex_12_2__Maxwell _Icepak_Coupling.mxwl and open it. The file Ex_12_2_Maxwell_Ice-
pak_Coupling can be found at ICEPAK_ROOT/tutorials/Maxwell.
• Double click the Setup cell of the Maxwell3DDesign1 system to launch Maxwell.
In this step you will set the conductivity of the aluminum plate as function of temperature. This will
enable you to get the temperature from Icepak and recalculate the losses based on temperature de-
pendent properties. To set temperature dependent properties,
• Select the Stock object from the history tree, right click and select Assign Material.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
708 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 709
Maxwell to ANSYS Icepak Coupling Tutorial
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
710 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
– Go to the Thermal Modifier column for bulk conductivity and select Edit.
→ Press OK.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 711
Maxwell to ANSYS Icepak Coupling Tutorial
– Press OK to close the View/Edit Material and the Select Definition panels.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
712 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
• In the panel enable the option Include Temperature Dependence and Enable Feedback.
• Press OK.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 713
Maxwell to ANSYS Icepak Coupling Tutorial
Note
After entering the specifications, the Geometry and Setup cells in the Maxwell system
should appear as follows:
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
714 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Note
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 715
Maxwell to ANSYS Icepak Coupling Tutorial
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
716 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
– Select Input>Quantity>OhmicLoss
– Select Input>Geometry>Volume>Stock
– Select Output>Eval
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 717
Maxwell to ANSYS Icepak Coupling Tutorial
Close Maxwell.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
718 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Note
After solving, the Maxwell3DDesign1 system should have green check mark in the
Solution cell. If not, select Update from the context menu of the Solution cell.
In the project schematic, drag and drop a Geometry system on top of the Maxwell 3D Geometry cell.
Double click the Geometry cell to launch DesignModeler. Click Generate to create the objects.
Suppress Geometry
• On the tree outline, right click on the coil_Section1 object and click Suppress Body.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 719
Maxwell to ANSYS Icepak Coupling Tutorial
Simplify Geometry
• Set the geometry selection filter to bodies and select the Coil object. Go to the Tools menu. Select Elec-
tronics> Simplify. Note that Simplify1 shows up on the tree outline and the Details view is populated
with the simplify form. Go to the Details view.
• Change the Simplification Type to Level 3. Ensure Selected Bodies is selected for the Selection Filter
and choose Fine for Facet Quality.
• Click Generate.
Note
The coil object has now been converted into a simple shape and hence is automatically
recognized as a CAD block object in Icepak.
• Next, simplify the Stock object using Level 2 for the Simplification Type. See the figure below.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
720 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
Drag and drop an Icepak system on top of the Geometry cell to transfer the geometry. If necessary, do
a right mouse click in the Maxwell 3D Solution cell and select Update before transferring to Icepak.
Then, connect the Maxwell 3D Solution cell to the Icepak Setup cell as shown below.
Double click the Icepak Setup cell to open Icepak. You will see that the geometry has been imported.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 721
Maxwell to ANSYS Icepak Coupling Tutorial
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
722 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
• Each side of the cabinet contains an opening. In the Cabinet panel, click the Properties tab and assign
Openings. Change the Min z and Max z Wall type to Opening.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 723
Maxwell to ANSYS Icepak Coupling Tutorial
The material for the Stock object is Aluminum; therefore keep the selection of default for the Stock
object.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
724 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings
Click Generate to mesh the model. Visualize the mesh at plane cuts and surface displays from the
Display tab.
• Enable the Gravity vector and make sure that gravity in the z-direction is -9.80665 m/ .
• Under Solution settings → Basic settings, keep the Number of iterations as 100.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 725
Maxwell to ANSYS Icepak Coupling Tutorial
ANSYS Workbench will close ANSYS Icepak to save the model, you will need to launch ANSYS Icepak
again to continue.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
726 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 7: Examine the Results
2. Go to the Solve menu and select Define report. In the Define summary report panel, keep the default
specifications. Select New and select the Stock objects in the Objects drop-down list. For the Value,
select Heat flow. Click Accept. Click Write to display the Report summary data panel shown in Fig-
ure 32.16: Report summary data Panel (p. 728).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 727
Maxwell to ANSYS Icepak Coupling Tutorial
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
728 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 33: Icepak – HFSS Coupling
33.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates how to model an ANSYS Icepak– HFSS workflow.
• Compare losses in HFSS and ANSYS Icepak to validate the data transfer.
33.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have basic familiarity with the setup and solution of HFSS and ANSYS
Icepak simulation.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 729
Icepak – HFSS Coupling
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
730 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 2: Build the Model
2. Double-click the Geometry cell to open DesignModeler as you need to edit the geometry first before
exporting into ANSYS Icepak.
b. Expand the node containing the parts and bodies. Suppress bodies Port, Port_1, Port_2 and Port_3.
c. Edit the geometry in DesignModeler using the Electronics option in the Tools menu.
• Click Generate.
• Click Generate.
Note
The Electronics menu is shown only if the DesignModeler option Enable Electronics
Options is turned on.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 731
Icepak – HFSS Coupling
3. Drag and drop an ANSYS Icepak template onto the project schematic on top of the Geometry cell (A2)
to transfer the geometry into ANSYS Icepak. Connect the HFSS Solution cell to the Icepak Setup cell.
Make sure that the HFSS Solution cell is “Updated” after establishing the connection.
Note
4. Right click on the Setup cell (C2) and select Edit to launch ANSYS Icepak.
xS -0.04 xE 0.04
yS -0.03 yE 0.03
zS -0.003 zE 0.003
b. Create openings for the flow inlet and outlet. Specify X velocity of 0.1 m/s for opening in min-x dir-
ection.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
732 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 5: Volume/Surface Mapping
In the Mesh control panel, specify Mesher HD for this model as it contains CAD objects. Click Generate.
Note
a. In the General setup tab, make sure that both flow and the temperature fields are switched on.
b. Select Laminar for the Flow regime and turn Off the Radiation.
Basic settings
No. of iterations = 500
Flow = 0.001
Energy = 1e-7
Advanced settings
Discretization scheme = First order
Precision = Double
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 733
Icepak – HFSS Coupling
3. Click Accept.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
734 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Examine the Results
Note
Alternatively, you can click the button in the File commands toolbar.
Note
a. Click New and select Substrate in Objects box. (Dielectric losses are predominant in Substrate).
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 735
Icepak – HFSS Coupling
1. Open the HFSS application if not already open, select HFSS →Fields →Calculator
Note
Heat flow value from HFSS can also be obtained from uns_out file.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
736 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Examine the Results
3. Click Accept.
Note
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 737
Icepak – HFSS Coupling
6. Click Accept.
Create a summary report for heat-flow from the openings of the cabinet.
1. Heat flow from cabinet boundaries represent surface heat loss as no other device is generating heat.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
738 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Examine the Results
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 739
Icepak – HFSS Coupling
Note
Heat flow value from HFSS can also be obtained from uns_out file.
a. Select the Substrate only to solve for which losses needs to be applied.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
740 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 8: Examine the Results
3. Click Accept.
1. Create a summary report for heat-flow from the openings of the cabinet.
• Heat flow from cabinet boundaries represent total heat loss as no other device is generating heat.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 741
Icepak – HFSS Coupling
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
742 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Step 9: Summary
Note
Heat flow value from HFSS can also be obtained from uns_out file.
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 743
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
744 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
CAD file, 327
Index IDF, 315, 354
tcb file, 425
A trace layer, 357, 437
Airborne Electronics System, 693 individual side specification, 110
Avionics Box, 565
J
B Joule heating, 373
BGA-package, 213, 423
L
C loss coefficient, 193
CAD loss coefficient vs Re, 209
geometry, 325
import, 327 M
CFD Post, 463 Maxwell to Icepak, 707
CFD Post in Workbench, 463 MCAD Geometry
cold-plate, 131-132 Design Modeler, 601
mesh exercise, 177
D microelectronics, 391
Datacenter cooling modeling
high density, 499 radiation, 265
Design Modeler monitor point, 405
electronics, 541 mouse conventions, 2
MCAD Geometry, 601 MRF, 675
Dimensions tab, 424 multi-level meshing, 411, 414
E N
Edit object panel, 6 non-conformal
Electronics assembly, 136
Design Modeler, 541 mesh, 161, 169, 171
nested, 152
F
finned heat sink, 3, 17
O
Functions object parameters, 297
compound, 240 obtaining support, 2
objective, 240 optimization run, 244
primary, 240 orthotropic material properties, 148
H P
heat pipe, 145, 151 param value, 237
heat sink, 61 parameterization, 99
finned, 3, 17 parametric runs, 218
inline or staggered, 213 parametric trials
heat transfer coefficient, 428 multiple trials, 117
help
obtaining support, 2 R
radiation model
I discrete ordinates, 251, 267
Icepak in Workbench, 447 ray tracing, 268
Icepak – HFSS coupling, 729 rf amplifier, 49, 65
import
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 745
Index
S
search fan library, 62
summary report, 167
support
obtaining help, 2
System
Electronics, 693
System Level Geometry
Translation, 623
T
Thermal Resistance, 235
trace heating, 373
trace layer, 353
import, 357, 437
transient simulation, 273
Translation
MCAD Geometry, 623
typographical conventions, 1
W
Workbench
Icepak, 447
Maxwell to Icepak, 707
Z
zero slack, 182, 435, 441
zoom-in modeling, 293, 303
Release 15.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
746 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.